JP2019205914A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of reducing the required number of driving means and reducing cost accordingly.SOLUTION: In a second rotary decorative body 550 rotatably arranged at a first arm 500, one end of a second arm 600 is pivotally supported, and the other end of the second arm 600 is displaceably connected to a case member 400. Therefore, when the first arm 500 is displaced with respect to the case member 400, the second rotary decorative body 550 can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first arm 500 accordingly as an angle formed by the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 is changed. Therefore, a drive motor 900 can work as means to displace the first arm 500 as well as means to rotate the second rotary decorative body 550. Therefore, the required number of drive motors can be reduced and cost can be reduced accordingly.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 7

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first decorative body and the second decorative body are disposed so as to be displaceable in a game area or the like, and the first decorative body and the second decorative body are driven. A device that produces an effect by being displaced by the driving force of the means is known.

JP 2012-115580 A

  However, in order to displace each of the first decorative body and the second decorative body independently, driving means are separately required for each of the first decorative body and the second decorative body, There was a problem that the cost increased accordingly.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the necessary number of driving means and reduce the cost accordingly.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a case member, an arm member displaceably disposed on the case member, a driving force applied to the arm member, and the arm member disposed in the case. A second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, one end of which is pivotally supported by the second rotating member, and the other end of the case. And a connecting member connected to the member so as to be displaceable.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein a first rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member and a driving force applied to the first rotating member to provide the first rotating member. Driving means for rotating the rotating member relative to the arm member.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged coaxially.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the driving force is applied from the driving means, the arm member is displaced with respect to the case member. In this case, one end of the connecting member is pivotally supported by the second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and the other end of the connecting member is movably connected to the case member. When displaced with respect to the case member, the angle formed by the arm member and the connecting member (the straight line connecting the connecting position where one end of the connecting member is connected to the second rotating member and the arm shaft, and the second rotating member With the change in the angle between the connecting position where one end of the connecting member is connected and the straight line connecting the connecting position where the other end of the connecting member is connected to the case member, the second rotating member is made relative to the arm member. It can be displaced (rotated). That is, since the driving means for applying the driving force to the arm member can be used as the means for rotating the second rotating member, the driving means only for rotating the second rotating member can be dispensed with.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the driving force is applied to the first rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and the first rotation Since the driving means for rotating the member relative to the arm member is provided, the arm member is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means, and the second rotating member is rotated along with the displacement of the arm member. The first rotating member can be rotated by the driving force applied from the driving means. That is, it is not necessary to provide driving means (total of three) for each of the arm member, the second rotating member, and the first rotating member, and the arm member, the second rotating member, and the first rotating member are driven by the two driving means. can do.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the second aspect, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged on the same axis. It is possible to enhance the effect when both the one-rotating members are rotated simultaneously with the displacement of the arm member.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine, and shows a state where the first arm and the second arm of the arm operation unit are arranged at the first position. It is a perspective view of an arm operation unit in the state where the 1st arm and the 2nd arm are arranged in the 1st position. It is a perspective view of an arm operation unit in the state where the 1st arm and the 2nd arm are arranged in the 1st position. It is a perspective view of an arm operation unit in the state where the 1st arm and the 2nd arm are arranged in the 2nd position. It is a perspective view of an arm operation unit in the state where the 1st arm and the 2nd arm are arranged in the 2nd position. (A) is a front perspective view of the first arm, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the first arm. (A) is the front perspective view which expanded partially by making the front end side of a 1st arm into an exploded state, (b) is the back perspective view which expanded partially by making the front end side of a 1st arm into an exploded state. is there. It is a partial expanded rear view in the container of a 1st arm. It is a partial expansion perspective view in the connection part of the wheel gear of a rotation mechanism, and the shaft of a 1st rotation decoration body. (A) is a top view of the shaft body, (b) is a front view of the shaft body in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is an arrow XIVc in FIG. 14 (a). It is a side view of the shaft body in the direction view, (d) is a top view of the wheel gear, (e) is a cross-sectional view of the wheel gear along the XIVe-XIVe line of FIG. ) Is a front view of the wheel gear as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVf in FIG. 14D, and FIG. 14G is a top view of the retaining ring. (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged top view of a wheel gear. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a rotation mechanism. (A) is a front perspective view of the second arm, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the second arm. It is a front perspective view of a gear member, a reduction gear, and a drive motor in the state where it was attached to the 1st base body. It is a front view of the gear member in the state where the 1st arm was connected. (A) is a front view of a gear member, (b) is a side view of the gear member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 20 (a), and (c) is an XXc− in FIG. 20 (a). It is sectional drawing of the gear member in the XXc line. (A) is a front view of a 1st base body, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st base body in the XXIb-XXIb line | wire of Fig.21 (a). (A) is a front view of the 1st arm and 2nd arm and gear member which are arrange | positioned in a 1st position, (b) is a part of the 1st arm and gear member in the XXIIb part of Fig.22 (a) It is an enlarged front view. (A) is a front view of the first arm, the second arm, and the gear member in a state where the gear member is reversely rotated from the state shown in FIG. 22 (a), and (b) is a front view of FIG. It is the elements on larger scale of the 1st arm and gear member in a XXIIIb part. (A) is a front view of the 1st arm and 2nd arm and gear member which are arrange | positioned in a 2nd position, (b) is a part of the 1st arm and gear member in the XXIVb part of Fig.24 (a) It is an enlarged front view. (A) is a front view of the first arm, the second arm, and the gear member in a state where the gear member is rotated forward from the state shown in FIG. 24 (a), and (b) is a front view of FIG. 25 (a). It is a partial expanded front view of the 1st arm and gear member in a XXVb part. (A) is a front view of a 2nd base body, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd base in the XXVIb-XXVIb line | wire of Fig.26 (a). It is a disassembled back perspective view of a case body. (A) is a partially enlarged rear view of the second protrusion, (b) is a side view of the second protrusion in the direction of arrow XXVIIIb in FIG. 28 (a), and (c) is a side view of FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view of the second protrusion along the line XXVIIIc-XXVIIIc. (A) is a front view of the shaft body and the retaining ring in the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the shaft body and the retaining ring along the line XXIXb-XXIXb in FIG. () Is a front view of a shaft body and a retaining ring in the third embodiment, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the shaft body and the retaining ring taken along line XXIXd-XXIXd in FIG. 29 (c).

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 28, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower dish 50 is placed below the lower dish 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1). (See below). The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 on the front surface of the game board 13 and a resin arc member (not shown) formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. This is a substantially circular region (region in which a winning opening or the like is provided and the launched ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. Further, in the state of the pachinko machine 10, a resin formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end portion of the outer rail 62. The made circular arc member is in contact with and fixed to the base plate 60.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba and a 7-segment display 37Bb which are light emitting means.

  The first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state by a lighting state, indicates whether or not it is fluctuating by a lighting state, and a stop pattern is definitely changed. Whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot, the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or the off symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, lottery is performed when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are entered. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot is ended, that is, when the probability is changing (probability is changing), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special gaming state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and a ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. Also, the short-time state (mid-time) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second entrance It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) that is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the chance of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, which is longer than normal Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared with a case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to sphere. Thus, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count which the electrically-driven accessory 640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per time is not shown. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a first entry port 64 and a second entry port 640 as a trigger (start winning prize) as a trigger while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display units 37A and 37B. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays three symbols in a variable manner, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol with the passage of a ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A configured second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a period of time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities to open the electric combination 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the time reduction.

  It should be noted that the second entrance 640 may be changed during the probability change or in a short time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or in the time reduction, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set to be shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball flowing down to the right of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. . When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays the variation, and if the winning lottery result is a win, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result is out of place. For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of 4 times, and the number of spheres retained is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above and also lit on the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. You may make it carry out using a part of apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol hold lamp may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a jackpot, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 640 through which a sphere can enter is disposed below the first entrance 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances for paying out 5 balls as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640, for example, The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 is five. May be.

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the time reduction, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is also short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of a big hit between when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second entrance 640 is low or high. Are the same. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during probability change and time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to be electrically driven. It is advantageous for the player to set the position to the open state and aim for a 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is being probable, shorting, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 becomes a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, The LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a big hit is generated. Indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And both. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37Aa and LED 37Ba corresponding to the jackpot are turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is opened. You may make it form as a special game state. Further, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, two) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first entrance 64, for example, a variable display device unit. The left side of 80 is also acceptable.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 are provided at the center and right corner on the lower side of the game board 13 for adhering stamps and identification labels, etc. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the frame 14.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 executes main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To do.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a front with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the side, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To do.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a to have a launch strength according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and shows a state in which the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 of the arm operation unit 300 are arranged at the first position.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the arm operation unit 300 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13 (the back side in FIG. 5), and the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are moved between the first position and the second position. It is formed to be displaceable between them.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are projected toward the center of the game board 13 in the first position, and the first rotary ornament 540 and the second rotary ornament 550 are the first ones. The first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are retracted to the side of the third symbol display device 81 and retracted to the rear side of the game board 13 in the second position while being arranged at the front center of the three symbol display device 81. Is done. In connection with this, the 1st rotation decoration body 540 and the 2nd rotation decoration body 550 are made invisible to a player (refer FIG. 2).

  Next, the detailed configuration of the arm operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  6 and 7 are perspective views of the arm operation unit 300 in a state in which the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are disposed at the first position, and FIGS. 8 and 9 illustrate the first arm 500 and the second arm 500, respectively. It is a perspective view of arm operation unit 300 in the state where arm 600 was arranged in the 2nd position. 7 and 9 illustrate a state where the first cover body 420 and the second cover body 440 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, the arm operation unit 300 includes a box-shaped first base body 410 that is open on one surface side, and is fastened and fixed to one surface side of the first base body 410. A first cover body 420 that closes the open portion, a second base body 430 that is detachably connected to the first base body 410 and that is open on one side, and one surface of the second base body 430 And a second cover body 440 that closes and fixes the open portion (box-shaped portion) of the second base body 430, and the case member 400 is formed by these members 410, 420, 430, and 440. Each member 410, 420, 430, 440 is formed of a light transmissive material.

  The case member 400 includes a first arm 500 and a second arm 600, a gear member 700 connected to the first arm 500, and a drive motor 900 that applies a rotational driving force to the gear member 700 via a reduction gear 800. Are arranged.

  The first arm 500 is pivotally supported by the first base body 410 and the first cover body 420 via the arm shaft 520, and the first position (see FIGS. 6 and 7) and the first position around the arm shaft 520. It can be displaced between two positions (FIGS. 8 and 9). Here, the first arm 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16.

  FIG. 10A is a front perspective view of the first arm 500, and FIG. 10B is a rear perspective view of the first arm 500. FIG. 11A is a front perspective view partially enlarged with the distal end side of the first arm 500 in an exploded state. FIG. 11B is a partial perspective view with the distal end side of the first arm 500 in an exploded state. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the first arm 500 includes a main body member 510 formed of a resin material, an arm shaft 520 that rotatably supports the main body member 510 on the first base body 410, and the main body portion 510. A rotation mechanism 530 disposed on the distal end side, a first rotation decoration body 540 rotated by the rotation mechanism 530, and a second rotation decoration body 550 disposed on the back side of the first rotation decoration body 540. With.

  The main body member 510 includes a connection-side main body 511, a swing-side main body 512 connected to the end of the connection-side main body 511, and an end of the swing-side main body 512 opposite to the connection-side main body 511. The connection side main body 511, the rocking | swiveling side main body 512, and the storage body 513 are integrally formed from the resin material.

  The connection side main body 511 is a part formed in the shape of a long flat plate, and a guide groove 511a opened in the plate surface extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the connection side main body 511. The projecting pin 730 of the gear member 700 is inserted into the guide groove 511a (see FIG. 19), and the connection-side main body 511 and the gear member 700 are connected via the guide groove 511a and the projecting pin 730.

  The connection-side main body 511 is provided with a wall portion 511b which is continuous along the outer edge of the flat plate portion and the inner edge of the guide groove 511a and is formed in a rectangular rib shape in cross section. Thereby, since the rigidity of the connection side main body 511 improves, it can suppress that the connection side main body 511 twists and deform | transforms when the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a is pressed by the protruding pin 730. Therefore, the projecting pin 730 of the gear member 700 can be smoothly moved along the guide groove 511a. Further, by providing the wall portion 511b along the outer edge of the flat plate shape and the inner edge of the guide groove 511a in this way, the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a is achieved while ensuring both rigidity and weight reduction of the connection side body 511. Thus, the pressure receiving area that is pressed against the projecting pin 730 can be secured. As a result, the durability of the connection-side main body 511 and the gear member 700 (projecting pin 730) can be improved.

  The swing side main body 512 is formed in a shape in which a side connected to the connection side main body 511 is curved in an arc shape and a side opposite to the connection side main body 511 is bent in a dogleg shape. The arm shaft 520 is integrally formed at a connection portion between the swing side main body 512 and the connection side main body 511, and vertically extends from the flat plate-like portions of the connection side main body 511 and the swing side main body 512 toward the back side. Established.

  Here, the swing-side main body 512 is continuous with the flat plate-like portion formed in a flat plate shape parallel to the flat plate-like portion of the connection-side main body 511 and the outer edge of the flat plate-like portion, and is erected from the flat plate-like portion. A rectangular box-shaped hollow box having an internal space is formed from a base having a rectangular cross-section wall portion and a flat plate body fastened and fixed to the standing tip side of the wall portion of the base body. .

  As a result, the drive motor 900 for displacing the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 while reducing the weight of the oscillating side main body 512 while securing the section coefficient of the oscillating side main body 512 to make it difficult to bend and deform. Can be reduced. Therefore, since the length dimension of the rocking | swiveling side main body 512 can be lengthened more, the moving amount of the front decoration body 540 etc. accompanying the displacement of the 1st arm 500 can be enlarged, and an effect can be heightened.

  Further, since the swinging side body 512 is formed in a hollow box shape, electrical wiring (power supply line, signal line, etc., not shown) of the rotation mechanism 530 is routed using the internal space ( Wiring). Thereby, damage to the electrical wiring can be suppressed. In particular, in this embodiment, after the electrical wiring of the rotation mechanism 530 is passed through the internal space of the swing side main body 512, the end of the swing side main body 512 (that is, the connection with the coupling side main body 511). A portion where the arm shaft 520 is formed). Since the arm shaft 520 is the center of rotation of the first arm 500 and is a portion where the displacement of the first arm 500 is minimized, the electrical wiring can be taken out from the vicinity of the arm shaft 520, so that the electrical It is possible to improve the durability of the wiring extraction portion.

  The container 513 is disposed on the distal end side of the swing side main body 512 (that is, the end opposite to the end connected to the coupling side main body 511), and is formed in a circular cylinder in front view. A rotating mechanism 530 that applies a rotational driving force to the first rotating decorative body 540 is disposed in the internal space. The detailed configuration of the rotation mechanism 530 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The container 513 includes a large-diameter portion 513a to which the swing side main body 512 is connected to the outer peripheral surface, a small-diameter portion 513b having an outer peripheral surface smaller in diameter than the large-diameter portion 513a, the large-diameter portion 513a and the small-diameter portion 513b. And a step portion 513c formed as a flat end surface perpendicular to the axis, and the second main body 551 of the second rotating decorative body 550 is rotatably fitted around the small diameter portion 513b.

  The first rotating decorative body 540 is a member that is disposed on the distal end side (container 513) of the first arm 500 and performs an effect by rotation, and includes a disk-shaped first main body 541 and the first main body 541. A shaft-shaped shaft body 542 located at the center and protruding from the back surface side, and a first decoration portion 543 that decorates the front surface side of the first main body 541 are provided. When a rotational driving force is applied to the shaft body 542 from the rotation mechanism 530, the first rotation decoration body 540 (first decoration portion 543) is relatively rotated with respect to the housing body 513 (first arm 500).

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative portion 543 is formed on the front surface side of the first main body 541 as a form in which a plurality of tapered acute-angled bodies spread radially outward from the center toward the radially outer side. The first decorative portion 543 is partially formed of a light transmissive material on the front side, so that light emitted from an LED (not shown) disposed therein can be visually recognized.

  The second rotating decorative body 550 is a member that is arranged coaxially with the shaft body 542 on the back side of the first rotating decorative body 540 and that produces an effect by rotation. The flat extension part 552 extended toward the radial direction outward from the outer peripheral side of 2 main body 551, and the 2nd decoration part 553 which decorates the outer peripheral side of the 2nd main body 551 are provided. An end of a second arm 600 described later is rotatably connected to the extended tip of the extended portion 552 (see FIG. 17).

  As described above, the second rotating decorative body 550 is rotatably supported by the container 513 by fitting the second main body 551 to the small diameter portion 513b of the container 513. In this case, in a state where the shaft body 542 of the first rotating decoration body 540 is connected to the rotation mechanism 530, the second rotating decoration body 550 (second main body 551) is connected to the first main body 541 of the first rotation decoration body 540. Movement in the axial direction is restricted between the back surface and the step portion 513c of the container 513. That is, the second rotating decorative body 550 is held rotatably between the first rotating decorative body 540 and the container 513.

  In addition, since the 2nd rotation decoration body 550 is arrange | positioned at the back side (namely, game board 13 side) of the 1st rotation decoration body 540, with the displacement of the 1st arm 500 and the 2nd arm 600, it is 1st. The trajectory of the two arms 600 or the extended portion 552 overlaps with the first rotating decorative body 540, and a part of the first decorative portion 543 of the first rotating decorative body 540 is prevented from being hidden by the second arm 600 or the extending portion 552. it can. That is, while the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced, the entire first rotation decoration pair 540 (first decoration portion 543) can be exposed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16, a rotation mechanism 530 and a connection structure between the rotation mechanism 530 and the shaft body 542 of the first rotation decoration body 540 will be described. FIG. 12 is a partially enlarged rear view of the housing 513 of the first arm 500. FIG. 13 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a connecting portion between the wheel gear 533 of the rotating mechanism 530 and the shaft 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540. FIG. In FIG. 13, illustration of the first main body 541 and the first decorative portion 543 of the first rotating decorative body 540 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the rotation mechanism 530 is engaged with a drive motor 531 that generates a rotational drive force, a worm gear 532 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the worm gear 532. A wheel gear 533 into which the shaft body 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540 is inserted, and a retaining ring 534 functioning as a retaining member for the shaft body 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540 inserted into the wheel gear 533. Prepare. The worm gear 532 is formed as a worm (screw gear), and the wheel gear 533 is formed as a worm wheel (helical gear).

  The wheel gear 533 is disposed at the central portion of the housing body 513, and the shaft body 542 of the first rotary decorative body 540 is inserted into the insertion hole 533 b (see FIG. 14) of the wheel gear 533 from the front side of the housing body 513. It is inserted (see FIG. 11). The shaft body 542 inserted into the wheel gear 533 is restricted from coming out from the insertion hole 533 b of the wheel gear 533 in the axial direction by fitting the retaining ring 534 into the circumferential groove 542 c of the shaft body 542.

  With reference to FIG. 14, the detailed structure of the shaft body 542 and the wheel gear 533 of the 1st rotation decoration body 540 is demonstrated. 14 (a) is a top view of the shaft body 542, FIG. 14 (b) is a front view of the shaft body 542 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. It is a side view of the shaft body 542 in the arrow XIVc direction view of Fig.14 (a). 14 (d) is a top view of the wheel gear 533, FIG. 14 (e) is a cross-sectional view of the wheel gear 533 along the line XIVe-XIVe of FIG. 14 (d), and FIG. It is a front view of the wheel gear 533 in the arrow XIVf direction view of FIG.14 (d). FIG. 14G is a top view of the retaining ring 534.

  As shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the shaft body 542 has a cylindrical shaft-shaped body (that is, a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section) with a part of the outer surface in the axial direction (FIG. 14B and FIG. 14C). A flat surface 542a which is a plane parallel to the vertical direction of FIG. 14 (c) is formed into a D-shaped cross section 542b formed in a D-shaped cross section, and the outer surface of the D-shaped cross section b is along the circumferential direction. And a circumferential groove 542c having a U-shaped cross section that is continuously recessed, and is made of a brass material.

  The flat surface 542a is formed within a predetermined range from the axial end surface (upper surface) of the shaft body 542 along the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14B). That is, the flat surface 542a is also formed on the distal end side (upper surface side) of the shaft body 542 with respect to the circumferential groove 542c. In addition, the axial direction front-end | tip of the shaft body 542 (D-shaped cross-section part 542b) is made into a tapered shape by chamfering a corner (C surface processing). Thereby, the insertion operation to the insertion hole 533b can be performed smoothly.

  As shown in FIGS. 14D to 14F, the wheel gear 533 includes a cylindrical base portion 533c having an insertion hole 533b at the center, and a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the base portion 533c. Gear portion 533d and a projection portion 533e protruding in the axial direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 14 (e) and 14 (f)) from the axial end surface of the base portion 533c, and is formed from a resin material. The

  The insertion hole 533b is a flat surface 533a in which a part of the inner surface of the circular hole having a circular cross section is a flat surface parallel to the axial direction so that the D-shaped cross section 542b of the shaft body 542 can be inserted. It is formed in a D-shaped cross section. As a result, when the D-shaped cross section 542b of the shaft body 542 is inserted into the insertion hole 533b, the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542 and the flat surface 533a of the insertion hole 532b are engaged with each other, whereby the shaft body 542 and the hole gear are engaged. The drive torque can be transmitted to the 533.

  The protrusion 533e has a step in the state where the shaft body 542 is inserted into the insertion hole 533b to the limit position (that is, the end of the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542 (the lower end in FIG. 14B)). In the state of being in contact with the end face in the axial direction (the lower side face in FIG. 14 (e)), the projecting height is set to project from the upper face of the shaft body 542 in the axial direction (see FIG. 13).

  In addition, a flat surface 533e1 that is a plane parallel to the axial direction is formed on the projection portion 533e on the insertion hole 533b side (that is, the side facing the shaft body 542), and the flat surface 533e1 formed on the projection portion 533e. Is formed continuously with the flat surface 533a formed in the insertion hole 533b (that is, on the same plane). Accordingly, the flat surface 533e1 formed on the protrusion 533e and the flat surface 533a formed on the insertion hole 533b can be simultaneously engaged with the flat surface 542a formed on the D-shaped cross-section 542b of the shaft body 542. The

  On the other hand, the protrusion 533e is formed such that the back surface (outer peripheral surface, right side surface in FIG. 14D) opposite to the flat surface 533e1 is continuous with the outer peripheral surface of the base body portion 533c. As will be described later, the protrusion 533e is a portion that receives a load when the retaining ring 534 is mounted or when rotational torque is transmitted between the shaft body 542 and the wheel gear 533, and thus durability is ensured. There is a need to. Therefore, the protrusion 533e is formed at a position that is in phase with the flat surface 533a in the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533.

  That is, in the wheel gear 533, the base portion 533c has the thickest thickness (the radial direction (FIG. 14 (d) and FIG. 14 (e) left-right direction) in the portion where the flat surface 533a is formed in the insertion hole 533b. Strength). Therefore, the protrusion 533e is formed at a portion of the insertion hole 533b that is in phase with the flat surface 533a, so that the load acting from the protrusion 533e can be received at a thick portion where the strength is ensured. Therefore, the durability of the wheel member 533 can be improved. In addition, since the cross-sectional area of the protrusion 533e can be increased if it is in the same phase as the flat surface 533a in the insertion hole 533b, the strength is ensured and the protrusion 533e itself is durable. It is possible to improve the performance.

  As shown in FIG. 14G, the retaining ring 534 includes an annular portion 534b in which an opening end 534a is formed by cutting out a part of the annular shape, and a circumferential direction on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion 534b. It is formed as an E-type retaining ring that includes a projecting portion 534c that projects from three locations inward in the radial direction. The retaining ring 534 is manufactured by punching out the E shape shown in FIG. 14 (g) from a stainless steel plate and performing heat treatment such as quenching and tempering. However, the retaining ring 534 may be formed of a steel material or an aluminum alloy material.

  The three projecting portions 534c have concentric arcs at the projecting tips, and the virtual circle formed by connecting the projecting tips is slightly smaller than the diameter of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542. The Therefore, when the retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542, the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c in the shaft body 542 is pressed by the arcuate projecting tip of the projecting portion 534c in the retaining ring 534. . That is, until the pressing force is exceeded, the retaining ring 534 can be rotated together with the shaft body 542 by the projecting tip of the projecting portion 534c being in close contact with the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c (from the shaft body 542). Rotational torque can be transmitted to the protrusion 533e via the retaining ring 534).

  With reference to FIG. 15, the process of connecting the shaft body 542 of the 1st rotation decoration body 540 to the rotation mechanism 530 is demonstrated. FIGS. 15A to 15C are partially enlarged top views of the wheel gear 533.

  15A shows a state before the retaining ring 534 is attached to the shaft body 542, and FIG. 15B shows a state after the retaining ring 534 is attached to the shaft body 542. . FIG. 15C is a reference diagram of the rotation mechanism 530, and shows a form in which the protrusion 533e is omitted. 15A to 15C schematically show a state in which the distance between the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542 is enlarged.

  In the step of connecting the shaft body 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540 to the rotating mechanism 530, first, the first rotating decorative body 540 is attached to the front side of the housing body 513 with the second rotating decorative body 550 interposed ( FIG. 11). As a result, the D-shaped cross-section 542b of the shaft body 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540 inserted through the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533 is the end surface in the axial direction of the wheel gear 533 (upper surface, FIG. The retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c formed in the D-shaped end surface portion 542b.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, the retaining ring 534 is placed on the opposite side of the protruding portion 533e (with a phase of 180 relative to the protruding portion 533e) with the opening end 534a side facing the shaft body 542. The retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542 as shown in FIG. 15 (b) by using a radio pliers and arranged on the different sides) (see FIG. 13).

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, one arm of the radio pliers is locked to the back surface (the surface opposite to the flat surface 533 e 1) of the projection 533 e and the other arm of the radio pliers is locked to the retaining ring 534. The retaining ring 534 can be fitted into the circumferential groove 542c by locking the back surface side (the side opposite to the opening end 534a) and bringing these one and other arms close to each other.

  That is, since the shaft body 542 is not directly locked by the arm of the radio pliers, it is possible to prevent the surface of the shaft body 542 from being damaged or the shaft body 542 from being bent (the axis is bent). In particular, the shaft body 542 is made of a brass material, and is easily plastically deformed. Further, since the protrusion 533e is formed integrally with the wheel gear 533, that is, formed of a resin material, it is possible to make it difficult to slide the arm of the locked radio pliers. Therefore, the workability at the time of fitting the retaining ring 534 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 15B, in the state where the retaining ring 534 is attached to the shaft body 542, the protrusion 533e is positioned between the opening ends 534a of the retaining ring 534, so that the retaining ring 534 is the shaft body. It is possible to suppress the 542 from being removed from the circumferential groove 542c.

  Here, in the shaft body 542 (D-shaped stepped surface portion 542b), there is a region where the recessed depth of the circumferential groove 542c is reduced by the formation of the flat surface 542a. That is, there is a relative rotational position between the D-shaped cross-section 542b and the retaining ring 534 that is easily disengaged from each other, and at the relative rotational position, the inner wall surface of the overhanging portion 534c and the circumferential groove 542c. The engagement allowance is reduced. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 15C as a reference example, in the state where the protrusion 533e is not provided and the retaining ring 534 is rotatable relative to the shaft body 542, the tension of the retaining ring 534 is increased. A relative rotational position in which the protruding portion 534c is located on the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542 can be formed, and at this relative rotational position, as a whole, an engagement allowance between the protruding portion 534c and the inner wall surface of the circumferential groove 542c is reduced. Decrease. Therefore, when the load on the shaft body 542 is applied in the direction of coming out of the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533, the retaining ring 534 may fall off from the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542 in the axial direction. Further, at such a relative rotational position, there is a possibility that the retaining ring 534 may fall off when another member or the like comes into contact with the retaining ring 534 even if no load is applied to the shaft body 542 in the direction of coming out.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the protrusion 533e is positioned between the opening ends 534a of the retaining ring 534 fitted in the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542, so that the opening end 534a of the retaining ring 534 is located. Can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 533e, and the relative rotation of the retaining ring 534 with respect to the shaft body 542 can be suppressed. As a result, the relative rotational position of the shaft body 542 and the retaining ring 534 can be maintained at an appropriate position, so that the retaining ring 534 can be prevented from dropping from the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542.

  Next, a connection structure between the rotation mechanism 530 (the wheel gear 533) and the shaft body 542 of the first rotation decoration body 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) and 16 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the rotation mechanism 530. FIG. 16 (a) shows a state before the shaft body 542 is rotated with respect to the wheel gear 533 in FIG. In (b), the state after the shaft body 542 is rotated with respect to the wheel gear 533 is illustrated.

  16A and 16B, in order to facilitate understanding of the relative rotation state of the wheel gear 533 and the shaft body 542, a gap between the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 and the flat surface 542a is used. A schematic enlarged view is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, in the wheel gear 533, not only the flat surface 533a is formed in the insertion hole 533b, but also the flat surface 533e1 connected to the flat surface 533a is formed in the protrusion 533e. Thus, both of the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 can be engaged with the flat surface 542a in the D-shaped cross section 542b of the shaft body 542 (see FIG. 14). That is, since the flat surface 533e1 is formed on the protrusion 533e, the engagement area of the shaft body 542 with the flat surface 542a can be increased, and the rotational torque can be dispersed accordingly. As a result, durability of the shaft body 542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved.

  Further, as described above, the D-shaped cross-section portion of the shaft body 542 is in contact with the opening end 534a of the retaining ring 534 and plays the role of suppressing the relative rotation of the retaining ring 534 with respect to the shaft body 542. By engaging with the flat surface 542a in 542b, it also has a role for taking charge of rotational torque. Thereby, while improving the durability of the shaft body 542 and the wheel gear 533, the base portion 533c of the wheel gear 533 is extended in the axial direction, and compared with the case where the engagement area with the flat surface 542a is ensured. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size and weight.

  Here, as described above, the retaining ring 534 is formed such that the projecting tips of the three projecting portions 534c can press the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542. Therefore, when the retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542, the retaining ring 534 can be rotated together with the shaft body 542 (that is, rotated from the shaft body 542 to the protrusion 533e via the retaining ring 534). Torque can be transmitted).

  Thus, the rotational torque transmitted between the wheel gear 533 and the shaft body 542 is not handled only between the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542, but the wheel It can also be handled between the protrusion 533e of the gear 533 and the open end 534a of the retaining ring 534. As a result, the rotational torque can be dispersed, and the durability of the shaft body 542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved accordingly.

  In order to increase the engagement area on the flat surfaces 533a and 542a and improve the durability, as described above, the wheel gear 533 (base portion 533c) is increased in size and weight, As in the present embodiment, the wheel ring 534 (the base portion 533c) is made smaller and lighter by making the retaining ring 534, which plays the role of retaining the shaft body 542, also serving as the rotational torque. Can be achieved.

  Here, the mechanism for rotating the first rotating decorative body 540 (first decorative portion 543) is large because the first decorative portion 543 is formed in a relatively large size and has a large weight so as to obtain a function as a decorative body. Durability that receives rotational torque is required. On the other hand, since the first arm 500 is disposed at the tip position when the first arm 500 is displaced about the arm shaft 520, the mechanism is lightweight in order to suppress the inertial force when the first arm 500 is displaced. Is required.

  On the other hand, according to the rotation mechanism 530 in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotational torque can be received using the flat surface 533e1 of the protrusion 533e and the retaining ring 534, so that durability is ensured. However, the inertia force can be reduced by weight reduction, and the first arm 500 can be displaced smoothly.

  Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. The second arm 600 has one end pivotally supported by the extending portion 552 (see FIG. 11) of the second rotating decorative body 550 and the other end connected to the second base body 430 and the second cover body 440 so as to be displaceable. Is done. That is, with the displacement of the first arm 500 around the arm shaft 520, the shaft support portion on one end side is relatively rotated, and the other end side can be displaced along the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430. The Here, the second arm 600 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 17A is a front perspective view of the second arm 600, and FIG. 17B is a rear perspective view of the second arm 600. As shown in FIG. 17, the second arm 600 includes a main body member 610 formed in a long shape from a resin material, a fixed decorative body 620 fixed to one end of the main body member 610, and the other end of the main body portion 610. And a guide body 630 which is a cylindrical body having a circular cross-section and projecting toward the back surface.

  The main body member 610 is formed in a flat plate shape and is disposed on the front side of the main body member 610. The main body member 610 is continuous along the outer edge of the flat plate portion and has a rectangular rib-shaped wall standing from the flat plate portion. And a flat plate body fastened and fixed to the upright end side of the wall portion of the base body, and formed into a hollow box shape having a rectangular cross section having an internal space.

  Thereby, while ensuring the section modulus of the main body member 610 and making it difficult to bend and deform, the weight of the main body member 610 is reduced, and the load on the drive motor 900 when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced is reduced. it can. Further, since the main body member 610 has a hollow box shape, the electrical connection line of the fixed decorative body 620 can be routed (wired) using the internal space. Thereby, damage to the electrical wiring can be suppressed.

  The fixed decorative body 620 is a member that is disposed on the distal end side (one end side) of the second arm 600 (main body member 610), and has a connecting pin 621 that is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section protruding from the back surface thereof. Prepare. The connection pin 621 is pivotally supported via the collar C1 in the pivotal support hole 552a opened at the extension tip of the extension part 552 of the second rotary decorative body 550, so that one end of the second arm 600 is the first. The arm 500 (second rotating decorative body 550) is connected to be rotatable relative to the arm 500 (second rotating decorative body 550).

  In the present embodiment, the fixed decorative body 620 is formed as a form in which star shapes are concentrically overlapped. In addition, the fixed decorative body 620 is partially formed of a light-transmitting material on the front side, and light emission of an LED (not shown) disposed therein can be visually recognized.

  A pair of guide bodies 630 are disposed at a predetermined interval. The guide body 630 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430 via the collar C2, so that the other end of the second arm 600 is slidable along the guide groove 431. Thus, the second base body 430 is connected (see FIGS. 6 to 9).

  In the first position where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are projected from the front surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIGS. 5 to 7), the fixed arm 620 side of the pair of collars C2 is disposed. The positioned collar C2 is brought into contact with the upper end (upper side in FIG. 7) of the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430 and further movement is restricted, while the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are in the third pattern. In the second position retracted to the side of the display device 81 (the back of the game board 13) (see FIGS. 2, 8, and 9), it is located on the opposite side of the fixed decorative body 620 of the pair of collars C2. The collar C2 is brought into contact with the lower end (lower side in FIG. 9) of the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430, and further movement is restricted.

  Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. The gear member 700, the reduction gear 800, and the drive motor 900 are respectively supported by the first base body 410, and the gear member 700 is connected to the first arm 500 via the projecting pin 730. Here, the gear member 700, the reduction gear 800, and the drive motor 900 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  18 is a front perspective view of the gear member 700, the reduction gear 800, and the drive motor 900 attached to the first base body 410, and FIG. 19 is a gear member in a state where the first arm 500 is connected. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, a pinion gear 920 is fixed to the drive shaft 910 of the drive motor 900, and one of the reduction gears 800 of the two reduction gears 800 meshed with the pinion gear 920 is attached to the pinion gear 920. 800 is meshed. The gear member 700 is engaged with the other reduction gear 800 of the two reduction gears 800.

  Therefore, when the drive shaft 910 of the drive motor 900 is rotationally driven, the rotational drive force of the drive shaft 910 is transmitted to the gear member 700 via the pinion gear 920 and the reduction gear 800, and the gear member 700 is rotated. .

  The first base body 410 is provided with a rotational position detection sensor S on the side of the gear member 700. The rotational position detection sensor S is an optical sensor including a light emitting portion Sa and a light receiving portion Sb, and the detected portion 720 (flat plate portion 723) of the gear member 700 moves in a space between the light emitting portion Sa and the light receiving portion Sb. By disposing on the locus, the rotational position of the gear member 700 is detected based on the presence or absence of the detected portion 720 (flat plate portion 723).

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first arm 500 (connection-side main body 511) is connected to the gear member 700 via a projecting pin 730 inserted through the guide groove 511 a. Therefore, when the gear member 700 is rotated, the first arm 500 causes the connection-side main body 511 to follow the movement locus of the projecting pin 730 while moving the projecting pin 730 along the guide groove 511a. The arm shaft 520 is displaced about the center (see FIGS. 6 to 9).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the detailed structure of the gear member 700 is demonstrated. 20 (a) is a front view of the gear member 700, FIG. 20 (b) is a side view of the gear member 700 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXb in FIG. 20 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the gear member 700 in the XXc-XXc line | wire of Fig.20 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 20, the gear member 700 is disposed on the first base body 410 so as to be rotatable about a gear shaft 790 (see FIG. 18) and has teeth that can mesh with the reduction gear 800 on the outer peripheral surface. A gear body 710 to be engraved, a detected portion 720 projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body 710, and a protrusion protruding upward from the detected portion 720 in parallel with the gear shaft 790 The gear body 710, the detected portion 720, and the projecting pin 730 are integrally formed from a resin material.

  The gear main body 710 is formed in a disc shape, and a gear shaft 790 is fixed to a shaft hole penetratingly formed in the center. The teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface are formed in a range of a central angle of 330 degrees around the shaft hole. On the upper surface of the gear main body 710, four ribs extending in a radial line shape with the shaft hole as a center are erected to increase the overall rigidity.

  The detected part 720 is a part detected by the rotational position detection sensor S, and an overhanging base part 721 that protrudes radially outward from a region where the teeth are not engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear body 710, A pin receiving portion 722 connected to the protruding tip of the protruding base portion 721 and a flat plate portion 723 protruding outward in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface on the bottom surface side of the pin receiving portion 722 are provided.

  The overhang base 721 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above, and the thickness dimension thereof (the vertical dimension in FIGS. 20B and 20C) is the same as the tooth thickness dimension of the gear body 710. . The pin receiving portion 722 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is arranged in a posture in which the axial center of the cylinder is parallel to the gear shaft 790. As for the bottom face side of the pin receiving part 722, the side to which the overhang | projection base part 721 is connected is notched partially. The flat plate portion 723 is formed into a fan-shaped flat plate shape that becomes wider as it goes outward in the radial direction, and the thickness dimension thereof is smaller than the tooth thickness dimension of the gear body 710. Further, the bottom surface of the flat plate portion 723 is flush with the bottom surface of the pin receiving portion 722.

  The bottom surfaces of the pin receiving portion 722 and the flat plate portion 723 (the surface on the side facing the first base body 410, the lower surface of FIGS. 20B and 20C), the outer peripheral surface of the pin receiving portion 722, and the flat plate portion. A ridge line portion (that is, an edge portion of the bottom surface of the pin receiving portion 722 and the flat plate portion 723) intersecting with the side surface of 723 (FIG. 20B, the front side and the back side of the paper surface) is formed to be curved in a circular arc shape in cross section. The Therefore, as will be described later, when the bottom surface of the flat plate portion 723 comes into contact with the regulating rib 413 (see FIG. 21) due to the inclination of the gear member 700 (falling of the detected portion 720), the flat plate portion It is possible to suppress the edge of the bottom surface of 723 from being caught by the regulation rib 413. Therefore, the gear member 700 can be rotated smoothly.

  The projecting pin 730 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is disposed at a position eccentric from the gear shaft 790. In the present embodiment, the protruding pin 730 protrudes from the upper surface of the pin receiving portion 722 of the detected portion 720. The protruding pin 730 is formed at a position where the cylindrical axis is concentric with the pin receiving portion 722. Therefore, the projecting pin 730 is arranged in a posture parallel to the gear shaft 790.

  With reference to FIG. 21, a structure for attaching gear body 700 to first base body 410 will be described. FIG. 21A is a front view of the first base body 410, and FIG. 21B is a cross-sectional view of the first base body 410 taken along line XXIb-XXIb in FIG. FIG. 21 shows a state where only the gear member 700 and the rotational position detection sensor S are attached.

  As shown in FIG. 21, a bearing D is disposed on the first base body 410, and a gear shaft 790 is rotatably supported on the bearing D, so that the gear member 700 is attached to the first base body 410. Arranged on the upper surface side. The gear shaft 790 is provided with a retaining ring (not shown) in a circumferential groove recessed at the tip (the lower end in FIG. 21 (b)), whereby the bearing D, the gear member 700, and the gear shaft are mounted. 790 is held by the first base body 410.

  A support rib 411 is erected on the upper surface of the first base body 410, and the erected tip of the support rib 411 supports the bottom surface of the gear body 710 of the gear member 700. The support rib 411 extends along a virtual circle centered on the gear shaft 790 and is formed as a protrusion having a semispherical cross section, so that the gear member 700 can be supported with a small rotational resistance.

  The first base body 410 is provided with a recessed portion 412 extending along the movement locus of the pin receiving portion 720 and the flat plate portion 730 of the gear member 700. A regulating rib 413 is erected on the upper surface of the recessed portion 412, and a displacement of a predetermined amount or more of the detected portion 720 (displacement in a direction in which the detected portion 720 approaches the first base body 410, FIG. ) Regulate downward displacement).

  The restriction rib 413 extends along a virtual circle centered on the gear shaft 790 (see FIG. 21A) and is formed as a hemispherical cross section (see FIG. 21B). Specifically, the restriction rib 413 is located on an imaginary straight line connecting the axis of the gear shaft 790 and the axis of the projecting pin 730 (pin receiving portion 722) and is on the side connected to the flat plate portion 723. It extends along the movement trajectory of the bottom surface of pin receiving portion 722 (hereinafter referred to as “restricted portion P1”).

  In the first base body 410, the support rib 411 is in contact with the bottom surface of the gear body 710 of the gear member 700 to support the gear member 700 in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 21 (b)). The rib 413 is formed so as to have a gap between the bottom surface of the detected portion 720 of the gear member 700.

  Here, when the gear member 700 is rotationally driven and the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a of the first arm 500 (see FIG. 19), the projecting structure that presses the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a. The gear member 700 is inclined by the reaction force acting on the pin 730. In particular, the detected portion 720 formed to project outward in the radial direction is tilted (bending deformation in a direction approaching the upper surface of the first base body 410).

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the restriction rib 413 is erected along the movement locus of the detected portion 720 on the first base body 410, the gear member 700 is inclined (the detected portion 420 is In the case of falling), the detected portion 720 can be received by the restriction rib 413. Thereby, while suppressing an increase in the rotational resistance of the gear member 700, an excessive inclination of the gear member 700 can be avoided, and not only the detected portion 720 but also the gear shaft 790 and the tooth surface can be prevented from being damaged. Moreover, since it can suppress rotating with the tooth surface of the gear member 700 and the tooth surface of the reduction gear 800 shifted (center misalignment state), the rotational resistance of the gear member 700 becomes excessive and the tooth It is possible to suppress the surface from being worn.

  Moreover, the excessive inclination of the gear member 700 can be effectively suppressed by adopting the configuration in which the detection rib 413 receives the detected portion 720 having the maximum displacement when the gear member 700 is inclined. Further, in this way, the portion for exhibiting the function as the detected portion by the rotational position detection sensor S is also used as the portion for exhibiting the stopper function for suppressing the inclination of the gear member 700. The structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the parts for exhibiting both functions are divided into two parts.

  As described above, a gap is formed between the standing tip of the regulation rib 413 and the bottom surface of the detected portion 720 of the gear member 700. Therefore, when the gear member 700 is rotationally driven and the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a of the first arm 500, the reaction force to the projecting pin 730 that presses the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a. When the action is small, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of contact resistance by maintaining a gap between the bottom surface of the detected portion 720 and the standing tip of the regulating rib 413. Thereby, the drive force of the drive motor 900 required for rotation of the gear member 700 can be reduced.

  Here, the projecting pin 730 may be erected from the gear body 710 in the gear member 700. In the present embodiment, the projecting pin 730 is erected from the detected portion 720. When 700 is rotated and the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a, when the projecting pin 730 receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a, only the detected portion 720 is partially Therefore, the inclination of the gear body 710 (gear shaft 790) can be easily suppressed. That is, the deformation can be concentrated on the detected portion 720 and the deformation of the gear body 710 can be suppressed. Accordingly, the tooth surface of the gear main body 710 and the tooth surface of the reduction gear 800 are rotated in a shifted state, and it is possible to suppress excessive rotation resistance and wear of the tooth surface.

  On the other hand, the protruding pin 730 is positioned on the radially inner side (left side in FIG. 21B) than the regulating rib 413. That is, the regulating rib 413 (the regulated portion P1) is located radially outward (right side in FIG. 21B) from the base portion of the projecting pin 730 when viewed in the axial direction of the gear shaft 790 of the gear member 700.

  Therefore, when the projecting pin 730 receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a, the regulated portion P1 of the detected portion 720 (that is, the portion closest to the first case portion 410, and A portion that is formed in a cylindrical shape and has rigidity secured when received by the restriction rib 413 can be received by the restriction rib 413. Thereby, the inclination of the gear member 700 can be suppressed effectively.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21A, the restriction rib 413 is detected by the rotational position detection sensor S in a region beyond the rotational position detection sensor S (that is, the detected portion 720 (flat plate portion 723) of the gear member 700). Therefore, when the gear member 700 is rotated while the projecting pin 730 receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a, the flat plate portion 723 of the detected portion 720 detects the rotational position. It can suppress colliding with sensor S (light-receiving part Sb). Thereby, the reliability of the rotation position detection of the gear member 700 can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. When the gear member 700 is rotated forward (rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 7) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 900 from the state shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 (first position), the projecting pin 730 is guided to the guide groove. 511a is pressed, the first arm 500 is displaced about the gear shaft 520 (rotated counterclockwise about the gear shaft 520 in FIG. 7), and along with the displacement of the first arm 500, The second arm 600 slides the other end (guide body 630, see FIG. 17B) downward (downward in FIG. 7) along the guide groove 431, so that the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are moved. Is disposed at the second position shown in FIGS.

  On the other hand, when the gear member 700 is reversely rotated (rotated clockwise in FIG. 9) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 900 from the state shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 (second position), the projecting pin 730 guides. The inner wall surface of the groove 511a is pressed, and the first arm 500 is displaced about the gear shaft 520 (rotates clockwise about the gear shaft 520 in FIG. 7), and with the displacement of the first arm 500, The second arm 600 slides the other end (guide body 630, see FIG. 17B) upward along the guide groove 431 (upward in FIG. 9), so that the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are moved. Is disposed at the first position shown in FIGS.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, the second rotating decorative body 550 rotatably disposed on the first arm 500 has one end of the second arm 600 on the extending portion 552 of the second rotating decorative body 550. Is supported (see FIG. 17B), and the other end of the second arm 600 is slidably coupled along the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430.

  Therefore, when the first arm 500 is displaced with respect to the case member 400, an angle formed by the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 (that is, one end of the second arm 600 is placed on the second rotating decorative body 540). A straight line connecting the connection position (the shaft support position by the shaft support hole 552a and the connection pin 621, see FIGS. 11 and 17) and the arm shaft 520, and the connection position (by the shaft support hole 552a and the connection pin 621). Change in angle between a shaft support position) and a straight line connecting the other end of the second arm 600 (the guide body 630, see FIG. 17) to the connection position where the second case body 630 (guide shaft 631) is connected. Accordingly, the second rotating decorative body 550 can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first arm 500.

  As a result, the drive motor 900 that applies a driving force to the first arm 500 not only serves as a drive source for the first arm 500 to be displaced about the arm shaft 520, but also the second rotating decorative body 550 has the first rotation. It can also serve as a drive source for moving (rotating) relative to one arm 500. Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor only for rotating the second rotating decorative body 550.

  In this case, the first arm 500 is provided with a first rotation decoration body 540 coaxially with the second rotation decoration body 550, and the first rotation decoration body 540 can be rotated independently by the rotation mechanism 530. It is formed. Therefore, the first decorative body 540 and the first decorative portion 543 and the second decorative portion 553 of the second rotational decorative pair 550 are independently rotated on the same axis, and the first arm 500 is displaced. The game area can be moved linearly or curvedly, and as a result, the effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the first rotation decoration body 540 (first decoration part 543) and the second rotation decoration pair 550 (second decoration part 553) are set in the same rotation direction and have different rotations. Set to speed. Thereby, with the displacement of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600, the first rotating decorative body 540 (first decorative portion 543) and the second rotating decorative pair 550 (second decorative portion 553) are simultaneously rotated. In this case, the player can be given an impression that both of them rotate smoothly, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

  Here, the relative displacement (rotation) between the second rotating decorative body 550 and the first arm 500 may be configured such that the other end of the second arm 600 is rotatably supported by the second base body 430. Can be achieved. In this case, the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the other end of the second arm 600 is slidably coupled to the second base body 430 via the guide groove 431 of the second base pair 430. Thereby, the displaceable amount of the first arm 500 can be increased as compared with the case where the other end of the second arm 600 is rotatably supported by the second base body 430. If the displaceable amount of the first arm 500 increases, the rotatable amount of the second rotating decorative body 550 (second decorative portion 553) can also be increased. As a result, not only the effect by the displacement of the first arm 500 itself but also the effect by the rotation of the second decorative portion 553 in accordance with the displacement can be further enhanced.

  In the first position shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 have the collar C2 located on the fixed decorative body 620 side of the pair of collars C2 as described above. The second base body 430 is in contact with the upper end (upper side in FIG. 7) of the guide groove 431, and further movement is restricted. In this case, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 further include a part of the outer surface of the swing-side main body 512 of the first arm 500 that is curved in an arc shape (hereinafter referred to as “first position arm restricted portion P2”). Is further abutted against a notch end surface of the outer wall of the first base body 410 (hereinafter referred to as “first position base restricted portion P3”), and further movement is restricted.

  Further, in the second position shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 have the collar C2 located on the opposite side of the fixed decorative body 620 in the pair of collars C2, as described above. The second base body 430 is in contact with the lower end (lower side in FIG. 9) of the guide groove 431, and further movement is restricted. In this case, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are further part of the outer peripheral surface of the housing 513 of the first arm 500 (hereinafter referred to as “second position arm restricted portion P4”, FIG. 10B). 11 (b)) is in contact with the inner corner of the outer wall of the second base body 430 (hereinafter referred to as “second position base restricted portion P5”; see FIGS. 6 and 7), A part of the body member 610 of the second arm 600 (hereinafter referred to as “second position arm restricted portion P6”) is connected to the inner surface of the outer wall of the second base body 430 (hereinafter referred to as “second position base restricted portion P7”). Further movement is also restricted.

  Here, a holding structure for the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 disposed in the first position and the second position will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 25.

  FIG. 22A is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 arranged at the first position, and FIG. 22B is a first view of the XXIIb portion in FIG. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of one arm 500 and a gear member 700. FIG. 23A is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 in a state where the gear member 700 is reversely rotated from the state shown in FIG. 22A, and FIG. FIG. 24 is a partially enlarged front view of the first arm 500 and the gear member 700 in the XXIIIb portion of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the first position from the predetermined position (that is, the gear member 700 rotates in the reverse direction (FIG. 22 (b) clockwise)). 22), a straight line L1 connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the arm shaft 520 and a straight line L2 connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790 The angle θ formed becomes large.

  Therefore, when an external force acts on the first arm 500 and the external force is transmitted from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a to the projecting pin 730 (gear member 700), the first arm 500 is close to the first position. As the state increases, the force component in the direction of rotating the gear member 700 out of the force generated in the gear member 700 (that is, the force in the direction orthogonal to the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790). Component) can be reduced. As a result, when the first arm 500 is held in the first position, the driving force required for the driving motor 900 to counter an external force (for example, gravity) acting on the first arm 500 can be reduced. Accordingly, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and the energy consumption can be reduced.

  Here, when starting the displacement of the first arm 500 in a stopped state, the load of the drive motor 900 increases due to the influence of inertial force and static frictional force.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first arm 500 is stopped (that is, the first position shown in FIG. 22), the straight line L1 connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the arm shaft 520 is Since the angle θ formed by the axis L of the projecting pin 730 and the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the gear shaft 790 is large (that is, the reduction ratio is large), the displacement of the first arm 500 from the first position is reduced. When starting (that is, when the gear member 700 is rotated forward from the state shown in FIG. 22 (counterclockwise in FIG. 22B)), the load on the drive motor 900 can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, since the reduction ratio can be increased as described above, when the first arm 500 reaches the first position, the displacement speed of the first arm 500 can be set even if the rotation speed of the gear member 700 is constant. It can be decelerated. Therefore, an impact at the time of reaching the first position (particularly caused by a collision between the first position arm restricted portion P2 and the first position base restricted portion P3 and a collision with the upper end of the guide groove 431 of the collar C2). Durability) and the durability can be improved.

  The “predetermined position” when “the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the first position from the predetermined position” described above is a straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790. It means a state where the axis of the gear shaft 790 is positioned on L2 (that is, a state where the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 overlap).

  As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, the gear member 700 rotates in the reverse direction in the guide groove 511a in a state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are disposed at the first position (FIG. 22B). An area for further movement of the projecting pin 730 is formed by rotating clockwise and rotating in the first direction.

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 22 (the state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are disposed at the first position), the gear member 700 is reversely rotated (rotated in the first direction) as shown in FIG. As the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a, the first position arm restricted portion P2 is moved to the first position base restricted portion P3, and the collar C2 is moved to the upper end of the guide groove 431, respectively. And the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, the gap between the projecting pin 730 and the guide groove 511a, and the like can be absorbed. That is, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be pressed in the direction from the second position toward the first position (the left direction in FIG. 23A). Thereby, the 1st arm 500 and the 2nd arm 600 can be held firmly in the 1st position, suppressing backlash.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the present embodiment, after the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position shown in FIG. 22, the gear member 700 includes the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the arm shaft. The straight line L1 connecting the shaft centers of 520 and the straight line L2 connecting the shaft center of the projecting pin 730 and the shaft center of the gear shaft 790 is rotated to a position where they are orthogonal (that is, angle θ = 90 degrees).

  Therefore, even if an external force is applied to the first arm 500, the force component in the direction in which the gear member 700 is rotated (that is, in the direction orthogonal to the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790). Force component) is not generated, and the rotation of the gear member 700 can be restricted. As a result, since the first arm 500 can be mechanically maintained at the first position, the driving force of the driving motor 900 can be reduced (or released). As a result, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and energy consumption can be reduced.

  FIG. 24A is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 arranged at the second position, and FIG. 24B is the first view in the XXIVb portion of FIG. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of one arm 500 and a gear member 700. FIG. 25A is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 in a state where the gear member 700 is rotated forward from the state shown in FIG. 24A. FIG. 26 is a partially enlarged front view of the first arm 500 and the gear member 700 in the XXVb portion of FIG.

  According to this embodiment, even in the second position shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the same operational effects as in the case of the first position shown in FIGS.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 24, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the second position from the predetermined position (that is, the gear member 700 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 24B)). The angle θ formed by the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 increases.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the first arm 500, the force component in the direction in which the gear member 700 is rotated (the force component in the direction orthogonal to the straight line 2) is smaller as the first arm 500 is closer to the second position. it can. As a result, the driving force required to hold the first arm 500 in the second position can be reduced, and accordingly, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and the energy consumption can be reduced.

  Further, in the second position shown in FIG. 24, as in the case of the first position, the angle θ formed by the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 is large (that is, the reduction ratio is large). The load required for starting the displacement of the arm 500 (that is, when the gear member 700 is rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise in FIG. 22B) from the state shown in FIG. 24) is reduced. The capacity of 900 can be reduced. Further, by increasing the reduction ratio, an impact when reaching the second position (particularly, the collision between the second position arm restricted portions P4 and P6 and the second position base restricted portions P5 and P7, and Durability can be improved by suppressing (impact generated by collision with the lower end of the guide groove 431 of the collar C2).

  The “predetermined position” when “the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the second position from the predetermined position” described above is the same as the case described above, and the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the gear shaft. This means a state where the shaft center of the gear shaft 790 is positioned on the straight line L2 connecting the shaft centers of 790 (that is, a state where the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 overlap).

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the present embodiment, the gear member 700 is rotated forward in the guide groove 511a in a state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the second position (FIG. 24B). A region for further movement of the projecting pin 730 is formed by rotating counterclockwise and rotating in the second direction.

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 24 (the state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are disposed at the second position), the gear member 700 is rotated forward (rotated in the second direction) as shown in FIG. When the protruding pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a, the second position arm restricted portions P4 and P6 are moved to the second position base restricted portions P5 and P7, respectively, and the collar C2 is the lower end of the guide groove 431. The gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, the gap between the projecting pin 730 and the guide groove 511a, and the like can be absorbed. That is, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be pressed in the direction from the first position to the second position (right direction in FIG. 25A). Thereby, the 1st arm 500 and the 2nd arm 600 can be held firmly in the 2nd position, suppressing backlash.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the present embodiment, after the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are disposed at the second position shown in FIG. 24, the gear member 700 has a straight line L1 and a straight line L2 orthogonal to each other (that is, , Angle θ = 90 degrees). Therefore, even when an external force acts on the first arm 500, a force component in the direction in which the gear member 700 is rotated (a force component in a direction orthogonal to the straight line L2) is not generated, and the rotation of the gear member 700 can be restricted. it can. As a result, since the first arm 500 can be mechanically maintained at the second position, the driving force of the driving motor 900 can be reduced (or released). As a result, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and energy consumption can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, since the guide groove 511a is linearly extended, the gear member 700 is further reversely rotated after the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position shown in FIG. (Rotated in the first direction) and the projecting pin 730 can be gradually pressed against the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a when the state shown in FIG. That is, the operation of pressing the first position arm restricted portion P2 to the first position base restricted portion P3 and the collar C2 to the upper end of the guide groove 431, the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, The operation of absorbing the gap between the pin 730 and the guide groove 511a can be gradually advanced. Thereby, damage of each part can be controlled. The same applies when the gear member 700 is further rotated forward (rotated in the second direction) after being placed in the second position shown in FIG. The operation of pressing the portions P4 and P6 to the second position base restricted portions P5 and P7 and the collar C2 to the lower end of the guide groove 431, the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, the protruding pin 730 and the guide The operation | movement which absorbs the clearance gap between the grooves 511a can be advanced gradually, and the failure | damage of each part can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, in a state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are disposed at the first position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 have the first rotating decorative body 540 and the second rotation. The decorative body 550 and the fixed decorative body 620 are positioned outward (left side in FIG. 7) from the edge 433 of the second base body 430. As shown in FIG. 8, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are In the state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the second position, the first rotating decorative body 540, the second rotating decorative body 550, and the fixed decorative body 620 are stored in the storage surface portion of the second base body 430. 432.

  Therefore, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 pass through the edge portion 433 of the second base body 430. . In this case, each of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 is formed in an elongated shape, and a heavy object (first object) is located at a position farthest from the fulcrum (arm shaft 520 and guide body 630) of the elongated body. A rotating decorative body 540, a rotating mechanism 530, and the like are provided. Therefore, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are likely to swing in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board 13). May collide with the edge portion 433 and cause damage, or may be locked by the edge portion 433 of the second base body 430 and cannot be displaced.

  It is conceivable that the edge 433 of the second base body 430 is not positioned on the displacement locus of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600. However, expanding the second base body 430 to the entire displacement region of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 (that is, extending the position of the edge 433 to the left in FIGS. 7 and 9) Since the display area of the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is hidden by the second base body 430 (the flat storage surface portion 432), it cannot be performed, and the edge portion 433 of the second base body 430 is used as the first arm 500. And retreating out of the displacement locus of the second arm 600 (that is, retreating the position of the edge 433 to the right in FIGS. 7 and 9) is the back side of the second base body 430 (housing surface portion 432). Wiring and a board | substrate arrange | positioned in this are exposed, and since an external appearance is impaired, it cannot carry out. Here, the detailed configuration of the second base body 430 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 26A is a front view of the second base body 430, and FIG. 26B is a cross-sectional view of the second base body 430 along the line XXVIb-XXVIb of FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, the second base body 430 is at least the first rotation decoration body 540 and the second rotation decoration body. 55 and an edge portion 433 formed along the outer edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). 433 is formed to be curved in a circular arc cross section.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, the edge portion 433 has a thickness dimension (dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 26B) larger than that of the receiving surface portion 432, and the entire area in the thickness direction is curved in a cross-section arc shape. Formed.

  Thus, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position while securing an opening for exposing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the game area (game board 13). In addition, even if the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 swaying in the front-rear direction collide with the edge 433 of the second base body 430, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are accommodated by the arc-shaped curve of the cross section. The impact can be buffered by guiding toward the surface portion 432 side. Therefore, damage can be suppressed, and the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be prevented from being locked and stopped by the edge portion 433 of the second base body 430 and smoothly displaced.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the edge 433 is formed in a corrugated shape in which the outer edge (the left end in FIG. 26 (a)) is combined with a plurality of arc shapes in front view. The front surface (the front side surface in FIG. 26A) is also formed into a corrugated shape in which a plurality of arc shapes are combined. As described above, the decorative shape is applied to the outer edge and the surface of the edge portion 433 so that the edge portion 433 is formed to be curved in a circular arc shape with a relatively large diameter as in the present embodiment. Even if it exists, it can be made to recognize a player without a sense of incongruity as an integrated design with the curve of a circular arc shape and a decoration shape, and it can suppress that the edge part 433 stands out unnaturally.

  Further, the second base body 430 is formed of a light transmissive material, and the storage surface portion 432 in which the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced on the front surface side is formed as a flat surface on the front surface thereof. A decorative shape that is similar to and continuous with the edge portion 433 is formed on the back surface (see FIG. 27).

  As a result, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced on the front surface side (flat surface side) of the storage surface portion 432, the displacement of the first arm 500 and the like is prevented from being hindered and smoothly performed. Can be displaced. On the other hand, the storage surface portion 432 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the decoration shape is formed on the back surface thereof, so that the player feels uncomfortable with the edge portion 433 and the decoration shape on the back surface of the storage surface portion 432 as an integrated design. The above-described effect of recognizing the image can be ensured.

  Further, when the front surface of the storage surface portion 432 is formed as a flat surface, the flat surface (front surface) is apt to be scratched by sliding the first arm 500 and the second arm 600, and the back surface. Since the decorative shape is formed on the front surface, the front scratch and the rear decorative shape can be overlapped to make the front scratch inconspicuous.

  Next, the structure of the case member 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the case member 400.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the case member 400 includes a first base body 410 on which a first arm 500, a gear member 700, a reduction gear 800, and a drive motor 900 are disposed (see FIGS. 7 and 9), The first base body 410 is detachably connected to the second base body 430, and the receiving surface portion 432 and the edge portion 433 of the second base body 430 are decorated. Thereby, diversion of the case member 400 to other models can be performed efficiently.

  That is, the position of the arm shaft 520 of the first arm 500 is changed or the number of teeth of the reduction gear 800 or the pinion gear 920 is changed in accordance with the change of the displacement form (for example, displacement angle or displacement speed) of the first arm 500. If it is necessary to change the position of the arrangement in order to increase or decrease the (reduction ratio), if the decorative shape of the accommodation surface portion 432 or the edge portion 433 does not need to be changed, the entire case member 400 It is useless to change. Similarly, when it is necessary to change the decorative shape of the accommodation surface portion 432 or the edge portion 433, it is necessary to change the arrangement position of the arm shaft 520 of the first arm 500, the arrangement position of the reduction gear 800, or the like. If there is no, it is useless to change the entire case member 400.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the case member 400 includes the first base body 410 on which members related to driving such as the first arm 500 and the driving motor 900 are disposed, the housing surface portion 432, the edge portion 433, and the like. Since it is divided into two members, the second base body 430 on which the part related to the decoration is disposed, only one of the first base body 410 or the second base body 430 is changed according to the change contents, and the first base is changed. Since the other of the body 410 or the second base body 430 can be used as it is, the case member 400 can be efficiently used for other models.

  Here, since the other end of the second arm 600 is displaceably disposed on the second base body 430, the other end of the second arm 600 is displaceably disposed on the first base body 410. As compared with the above, the distance between the arm shaft 520 of the first arm 500 and the other end (guide body 630) of the second arm 600 can be increased (separated). Thereby, the displaceable amount of the 1st arm 500 can be enlarged, and the production effect by displacing the 1st arm 500 can be heightened.

  Note that the relationship between the second arm 600 and the case member 400 (second base body 430) is sufficient if the other end of the second arm 600 is connected to be displaceable. Therefore, the first arm 500 or the first arm 500 is sufficient. Even when the means for driving the motor (such as the drive motor 900, the reduction gear 800, or the gear member 700) is changed, or when the second arm 600 is changed in addition to this, the second base body 430 is used. Can be used as it is. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the other end of the second arm 600 is connected to the second base body 430 instead of the first base body 410 in this way, the case member 400 can be effectively diverted to other models. Both the increase in the displacement amount of the first arm 500 can be achieved.

  Next, the details of the connection structure between the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, the first base body 410 has a back surface as a region where the second base body 430 and the back plate member 450 are connected as a flat surface, and the flat surface includes a seating surface wall 415 and A pair of first protrusions 416 and a pair of second protrusions 417 protrude.

  The seating surface wall 415 is a part for forming the seating surface of the back plate member 450, and extends linearly in the vertical and horizontal directions as a protrusion having a rectangular cross section. The inner wall surface of the portion extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 27) of the seat surface wall 415 functions as a portion for positioning the second base body 430. That is, the distance from the inner wall surface of the portion extending in the vertical direction of the seating surface wall 415 to the first projection 416 is equal to the distance from one side surface (left side surface in FIG. 27) of the protruding plate portion 434 to the positioning hole 434a. It is said. Therefore, by making the side surface of the protruding plate portion 434 contact the inner wall surface of the seat surface wall 415, both can be positioned in the lateral direction.

  The seat surface wall 415 has the same height as the projecting tip surface of the first projection 416 and the second projection 417 (see the seat projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c, see FIG. 28). It is set (that is, the protruding front end surfaces of the respective portions 415 to 417 are arranged flush), and the front surface of the back plate member 450 is seated on the protruding front end surfaces of the respective portions 415 to 417.

  The first protrusion 416 is a portion for positioning the second base body 430 (projecting plate portion 434) with respect to the first base body 410 and forming a seating surface of the back plate member 450, and has a circular cross section. A female screw that can be fastened with a fastening screw (not shown) is recessed in the protruding front end surface of the cylindrical body. The second base body 430 is positioned with respect to the first base body 410 by inserting the pair of first protrusions 416 through the positioning holes 434 a of the protruding plate portion 434. In this case, the thickness dimension of the protruding plate portion 434 is set to a dimension that is the same as or slightly smaller than the protruding height dimension of the first protrusion 416, so that the rear plate member is also formed on the protruding front end surface of the first protrusion 416. The front of 450 is seated.

  The second protrusion 417 is a part for positioning the back plate member 450 with respect to the first base body 410 and forming a seating surface of the back plate member 450, and a pair of the second protrusions 417 is disposed. Here, the second protrusion 417 will be described with reference to FIG.

  28 (a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the second protrusion 417, and FIG. 28 (b) is a side view of the second protrusion 417 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIIIb in FIG. 28 (a). FIG. 28C is a cross-sectional view of the second protrusion 417 taken along line XXVIIIc-XXVIIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the second protrusion 417 includes a seating protrusion 417a formed in a circular column shape with a circular cross section, and a positioning protrusion 417b formed in a circular columnar shape with a smaller diameter than the seating surface protrusion 417a. And a connecting wall 417c having a rectangular cross section for connecting the outer peripheral surfaces of the seating surface protrusion 417a and the positioning protrusion 417b.

  The seat surface protrusion 417a and the connecting wall 417c are set to have the same protruding height dimension, and the protruding height dimension is set to be the same as the protruding height dimension of the seat surface wall 415 and the first protrusion 416. The That is, the front surface of the back plate member 450 is seated on the projecting front end surfaces of the seating surface projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c. Note that a female screw to which a fastening screw (not shown) can be fastened is recessed in the protruding front end surface of the seating surface protrusion 417a.

  The positioning projection 417b has a projecting height dimension larger than the projecting height dimension of the seating surface projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c, and can be inserted into the positioning hole 452 of the back plate member 450. The pair of positioning protrusions 417b (see FIG. 27) are inserted into the positioning holes 452 of the back plate member 450, whereby the back plate member 450 is positioned with respect to the first base body 410.

  The connecting wall 417c connects the bearing surface protrusion 417a and the positioning protrusion 417b in a straight line with the shortest distance. Here, while the seating surface protrusion 417a and the positioning protrusion 417b have a relatively small diameter, the protruding height is large, so that they collide with other members in the manufacturing process or the assembly process, or when transported after assembly. In addition, the seating surface protrusion 417a and the positioning protrusion 417b are connected by the connecting wall 417c, so that the rigidity of the second protrusion 417 as a whole is increased and the defect is removed. Can be suppressed.

  Further, by setting the projecting height dimension of the connection wall 417c to be the same as the projecting height dimension of the seat surface protrusion 417a, the seat surface protrusion 417a and the positioning protrusion 417b are connected to the connection wall 417c, and the second In addition to the role of increasing the strength of the protrusion 417 as a whole, it can also serve as a seating surface for seating the front surface of the back plate member 450. Therefore, the material cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the members having the respective roles are provided separately.

  Returning to FIG. On the second base body 430, a seat surface wall 425, a first protrusion 426, and a second protrusion 427 are provided projecting toward the back side below the protruding plate portion 434. The seat surface wall 425 is configured in the same manner as the seat surface wall 415 of the first base body 410 except that the arrangement position and the extension length thereof are different, and the first protrusion 426 and the second protrusion 427 are arranged in the same manner. Except for the difference in installation position, the first protrusion 416 and the second protrusion 417 of the first base body 410 are configured identically. Therefore, description of the seat surface wall 425, the first protrusion 426, and the second protrusion 427 is omitted.

  Further, the second base body 430 is provided with a protruding plate portion 434 projecting from the side surface (upper side surface in FIG. 27) connected to the first base body 410 toward the first base body 410. The protruding plate portion 434 is a portion that is overlapped and connected to the back surface of the first base body 410 and is formed in a plate shape that is rectangular in front view. A pair of positioning holes 434a, which are circular holes when viewed from the front, are formed in the protruding plate portion 434 so as to penetrate in the thickness direction, and positioning protrusions 434b are formed in a circular column shape with a circular cross section from the back surface of the protruding plate portion 434. Is projected.

  The second base body 430 is positioned with respect to the first base body 410 by inserting the first protrusions 416 of the first base body 410 into the pair of positioning holes 434 a of the protruding plate portion 434. In this case, the thickness dimension of the protruding plate part 434 is set to a dimension equivalent to the protruding height dimension of the seating surface wall 415, the first protrusion 416, etc. of the first base body 410. The front surface of the back plate member 450 is seated.

  The height of the rear surface of the projecting plate portion 434 is the same as the projecting tip surface of the seat surface wall 425, the first projection 426, and the second projection 427 (the seat surface projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c, see FIG. 28). It is set to a height position (that is, a height position where the back surface of the protruding plate portion 434 and the protruding front end surface of the seating surface wall 425 and the like are flush with each other). Therefore, the front surface of the back plate member 450 is seated on the back surface of the protruding part 434 and the protruding front end surfaces of the respective parts 425 to 427.

  The back plate member 450 is a member that is attached (fastened and fixed) to the back side of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 in order to connect the first base body 410 and the second base body 430. It is formed in a plate shape from a metal material. In addition, the back plate member 450 has a portion attached to the first base body 410 in a square shape when viewed from the front, and a portion attached to the second base body 430 is a portion attached to the first base body 410. Each is formed in a long rectangular shape having a narrower width.

  The back plate member 450 is formed by bending both sides along the direction connecting the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 (vertical direction in FIG. 27) toward the back side, and thereby the first base body 410 and the second base body. The bending rigidity with respect to the bending direction centering on the connection part with 430 (near the protruding plate part 434) is enhanced. Thereby, the connection strength of the 1st base body 410 and the 2nd base body 430 is securable.

  An insertion hole 451 and a positioning hole 452 are formed through the back plate member 450 in the plate thickness direction. The insertion hole 451 is a hole having a circular cross section with an inner diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the protruding front end surface of the first protrusions 416 and 426, through which a fastening screw (not shown) can be inserted, and corresponds to the first protrusions 416 and 426. Formed in each position. The positioning hole 452 is a circular hole having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the positioning protrusion 417b and the positioning protrusion 434b, and is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning protrusion 417b and the positioning protrusion 434b.

  Assembling of the case member 400 formed as described above first superimposes the protruding plate portion 434 of the second base body 430 on the lower portion (flat surface portion) of the back surface of the first base body 410. In this case, as described above, the protruding plate portion 434 of the second base body 430 is formed on the inner wall surface of the portion extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 27) of the seating surface wall 415 of the first base body 410. By bringing one side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 27) into contact, both can be positioned in the lateral direction. Accordingly, the first protrusion 416 can be easily inserted through the positioning hole 434a.

  Next, the back plate member 450 is placed on the back surface of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 and fastened and fixed by a fastening screw (not shown). That is, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) positioning projections 417b on the first base body 410 side and a plurality (two in this embodiment) positioning projections 417b, 434b on the second base body 430 side are positioned. Since the positions of the first protrusions 416 and 426 and the second protrusions 417 and 427 and the insertion holes 451 are matched by inserting them into the holes 452, the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 451 are inserted into the first protrusions 416. , 426 and second protrusions 417, 427, respectively. Thereby, the back plate member 450 is fastened and fixed to the back surfaces of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430, and the assembly of the case member 400 is completed.

  As described above, the case member 400 is connected to the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 by the metal back plate member 450 attached to the back side thereof. The rigidity of the case member 400 as a whole can be secured by strengthening the connection of the two base bodies 430.

  In this assembled state, the case member 400 has a plate-like shape because the protruding plate portion 434 formed on the second base body 430 is sandwiched between the back surface of the first base body 410 and the front surface of the back plate member 450. The rigidity of the case member 400 as a whole can be effectively increased while achieving simplification and downsizing of the structure by utilizing the overlapping of the bodies.

  The back plate member 450 is attached to the second base body 430 while fastening screws are fastened to the four corners of the square at a portion attached to the first base body 410 (a square portion when viewed from the front). Since the fastening screws are fastened to both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion to be formed (the elongated portion extending up and down), the case member 400 (the first member is efficiently utilized by utilizing the rigidity of the back plate member 450. The rigidity of the base body 410 and the second base body 430) can be increased.

  The case member 400 is assembled after the back plate member 450 is first attached (fastened and fixed) to the back surface of the second base body 430, and then the second base body 430 and the back plate member 450 fastened and fixed are attached to the second base body 430. 1 base body 410 may be attached (fastened and fixed).

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b). FIG. 29A is a front view of the shaft body 2542 and the retaining ring 2534 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 29B is a front view of the shaft body 2542 and the retaining ring 2534 taken along line XXIXb-XXIXb in FIG. FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the arcuate projecting tip of the projecting portion 534 c of the retaining ring 534 presses (closely contacts) the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542 c in the shaft body 542, so that the retaining ring 534 is secured to the shaft body 542. As described above, the shaft body 2542 of the second embodiment has an engaged portion 2542d that engages with the retaining ring 2534 in the circumferential direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, the shaft body 2542 is provided with an engaged portion 2542d recessed on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c. The engaged portion 2542d is a recess for receiving the overhang portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534, and the shaft body is positioned at a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a (ie, the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533). In a state where the flat surface 542a of the 542 is engaged (see FIG. 15A), it is recessed in the position opposite to the protruding portion 533e, the lower side in FIG. 29B.

  The retaining ring 2534 includes projecting portions 534c and 2534c that are formed to project radially inward from three circumferential positions on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion 534b. In the present embodiment, the overhanging portion 2534c located on the side that is 180 degrees out of phase with the opening end 534a (that is, located between the pair of overhanging portions 534c located on the opening end 534a side) The inward projecting dimension is set to be larger than the projecting dimension inward in the radial direction of the projecting portion 534c located on the opening end 534a side.

  According to the present embodiment, when the retaining ring 2534 is fitted to the appropriate position in the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 2542, the protruding portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534 is moved to the shaft body 2542 as shown in FIG. The engaged portion 2542d can be received. That is, one overhanging portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534 is engaged with the engaged portion 2542d formed as a recess in the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 2542, so that the shaft body 2542 is stopped. The wheel 2534 can be engaged in the circumferential direction.

  Thereby, since the relative movement of the retaining ring 2534 in the circumferential direction with respect to the shaft body 2542 can be restricted, the retaining ring 2534 can be reliably rotated together with the shaft body 2542. That is, since the retaining ring 2534 can be prevented from slipping in the circumferential direction with respect to the shaft body 2542, the rotational torque can be reliably transmitted from the shaft body 2542 to the protrusion 533 e via the retaining ring 2534 even with a large rotational torque. Can be transmitted.

  Thus, the rotational torque transmitted between the wheel gear 533 and the shaft body 2542 is not handled only between the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 2542, but the wheel It can also be handled between the projection 533 of the gear 533 and the open end 534a of the retaining ring 2534 (see FIG. 15B). As a result, the rotational torque can be dispersed, and the durability of the shaft body 2542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved accordingly.

  In this case, since the engaged portion 2542d of the shaft body 2542 is disposed at a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a, the shaft body 542 is inserted into the wheel gear 533, and the flat surface of the wheel gear 533 is inserted. In a state where the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542 is engaged with 533a and 533e1 (see FIG. 15A), the engaged portion 2542d is disposed at a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the protruding portion 533e (ie, The opening of the engaged portion 2542d is desired to be opposite to the protruding portion 533e).

  Therefore, the fitting direction of the retaining ring 2534 for positioning the protrusion 533e between the opening ends 534a of the retaining ring 2534 (see FIGS. 15A and 15B), and the overhanging portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534 Can be made to coincide with the fitting direction of the retaining ring 2534 for engaging (receiving) the engaged portion 2542d with the engaged portion 2542d of the shaft body 2542. As a result, the protruding portion 533e and the retaining ring 2534 are locked by the respective arms of the radio pliers, and only the operation of fitting the retaining ring 2534 into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 2542 is performed. The portion 2534c can be easily and reliably engaged with the engaged portion 2542d of the shaft body 2542.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 (c) and 29 (d). FIG. 29C is a front view of the shaft body 3542 and the retaining ring 3534 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 29D is a shaft body 3542 and a retaining ring 3534 taken along the line XXIXd-XXIXd in FIG. FIG.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the engaged portion 2542d is formed as a recess has been described. However, the engaged portion 3542d of the third embodiment is formed as a flat surface. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 29C and 29D, the shaft body 3542 has an engaged portion 3542d on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c. The engaged portion 3542d is formed as a flat surface parallel to the flat surface 542a, and the shaft body 542 is positioned at a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a (ie, the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533). When the flat surface 542a is engaged (see FIG. 15A), it is formed at a position opposite to the protruding portion 533e, the lower side of FIG. 29D.

The retaining ring 3534 includes projecting portions 534c and 3534c formed by projecting radially inward from three circumferential positions on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion 534b. In the present embodiment, the overhanging portion 3534c located on the side that is 180 degrees out of phase with the opening end 534a (that is, located between the pair of overhanging portions 534c located on the opening end 534a side) The inward projecting dimension is set to be larger than the projecting dimension inward in the radial direction of the projecting part 534c located on the opening end 534a side, and the projecting tip is axially formed (FIG. 29D). It is formed as a flat surface parallel to the (vertical direction).

According to the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the retaining ring 3534 is engaged with the shaft body 3542 by the engagement between the engaged portion 3542d of the shaft body 3542 and the protruding portion 3534c of the retaining ring 3534. Can be engaged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the retaining ring 3534 is prevented from slipping in the circumferential direction with respect to the shaft body 3542, and the rotational torque is also applied to the large rotational torque from the shaft body 3542 via the retaining ring 334. 15 (b)). As a result, the rotational torque is not only between the flat surfaces 533 a and 533 e 1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542 a of the shaft body 3542, but also between the protrusion 533 of the wheel gear 533 and the open end 534 a of the retaining ring 3534. Since it can be handled, the rotational torque can be dispersed, and the durability of the shaft body 3542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved accordingly.

  Further, since the engaged portion 3542d of the shaft body 3542 is disposed at a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a, as in the case of the second embodiment, the protrusion 533e, the retaining ring 3534, and the like. Are locked by each arm of the radio pliers, and only the operation of fitting the retaining ring 3534 into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 3542 is performed, and the overhanging portion 2534c of the retaining ring 3534 is engaged with the engaged portion of the shaft body 3542. 3542d can be easily and reliably engaged.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured by omitting a part of the configuration in each embodiment, or a part of the configuration in each embodiment may be the same as that in the other embodiments or modifications. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured in combination with or in place of the components.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide groove 511a is formed in the main body member 510 of the first arm 500 and the projecting pin 730 inserted through the guide groove 511a is projected from the gear member 700 is described. The guide member 511a may be formed in the gear member 700 while the projecting pin is projected from the main body member 510 of the first arm 500 and the projecting pin is inserted.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as alepatchi, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused may be used.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a fixed symbol after a symbol string consisting of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after insertion of a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives the player a predetermined game value is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a system in which a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where a pachinko machine and a slot machine are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  In a gaming machine comprising an arm member displaced about an arm axis and a driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the arm member about the arm axis, the driving force applied from the driving means A gear member that rotates about the gear shaft, the gear member including a protruding pin that protrudes at a position eccentric to the gear shaft, and the arm member protrudes from the gear member. A guide groove for receiving an installation pin, wherein the gear member is rotated in a first direction, and the projection pin is moved along the guide groove, whereby the arm member is disposed at a first position; The angle formed between the straight line connecting the shaft center of the installation pin and the arm shaft and the straight line connecting the shaft center of the projecting pin and the gear shaft increases as the arm member approaches the first position from the predetermined position. Game machine A1 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine A1, as the arm member approaches the first position from the predetermined position, an angle formed between a straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis and a straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the gear axis. Becomes larger. Therefore, when an external force acts on the arm member and the external force is transmitted to the gear member, the closer the arm member is to the first position, the more the force generated in the gear member rotates in the direction of rotating the gear member. The force component (that is, the force component in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the gear shaft) can be reduced. As a result, when the arm member is held at the first position, the driving force required for the driving means to counter an external force (for example, gravity) acting on the arm member can be reduced. The capacity of the means can be reduced and energy consumption can be reduced.

  Further, when the displacement of the arm member held at the first position is started, the load on the driving means increases due to the influence of inertial force or frictional force. Since the angle between the straight line connecting the shaft center of the installation pin and the arm shaft and the straight line connecting the shaft center of the projecting pin and the gear shaft is large (that is, a state where the reduction ratio is large), the arm member is moved from the first position. By reducing the load on the driving means when starting the displacement, the capacity of the driving means can be reduced. On the other hand, when the arm member reaches the first position, even if the rotation speed of the gear member is constant, the displacement speed of the arm member can be reduced. Can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the gear member is rotated in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and the projecting pin is moved along the guide groove so that the arm member is disposed at the second position. As the angle between the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the gear shaft approaches the arm member from the predetermined position to the second position, A gaming machine A2 characterized by an increase in size.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, as the arm member approaches the second position from the predetermined position, the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis, the axis of the projecting pin, and Since the angle formed by the straight line connecting the gear shafts is increased, the same effect as the gaming machine A1 can be obtained. That is, when the arm member is held at the second position, the driving force required for the driving means to counter an external force (for example, gravity) acting on the arm member can be reduced. The capacity can be reduced and energy consumption can be reduced.

  When starting the displacement of the arm member from the second position, the load on the driving means can be reduced to reduce the capacity, while the arm member reaches the second position. The impact at the time of arrival can be suppressed, and the durability can be improved.

  In the gaming machines A1 and A2, the angle formed between the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the gear shaft is such that the arm member is moved from the predetermined position to the first position. The “predetermined position” when it becomes larger as it approaches is a position where the arm shaft, the shaft center of the projecting pin, and the gear shaft are arranged on one straight line.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the arm member can be displaced to the first position by the rotation of the gear member in the first direction, and the arm member is in the first position in the guide groove of the arm member. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the state where the gear member is arranged, an area for the further rotation of the gear member in the first direction and movement of the projecting pin of the gear member is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the state where the arm member is disposed at the first position in the guide groove of the arm member, the gear member is rotated in the first direction. Since the region for moving the projecting pin is formed, the gear member is further rotated in the first direction from the state where the arm member is disposed at the first position, and the projecting pin is moved along the guide groove. The arm member can be pressed toward the first position by absorbing the gap between the arm shaft and its bearing or the gap between the projecting pin and the guide groove. Thereby, rattling at the first position of the arm member can be suppressed, and as a result, the arm member can be firmly held at the first position.

  In the gaming machine A3, after the arm member is disposed at the first position, the gear member connects a straight line connecting the shaft center of the projecting pin and the arm shaft and a shaft center of the projecting pin and the gear shaft. A gaming machine A4 which is rotated to a position where the straight line is orthogonal to the gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the gear member includes a straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm shaft, and the projecting pin after the arm member is disposed at the first position. Since the shaft and the straight line connecting the gear shaft are rotated to a position orthogonal to each other, even if an external force is applied to the arm member, the force component in the direction of rotating the gear member (that is, the axis of the projecting pin and the gear) Force component in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the axes) does not occur, and the rotation of the gear member can be restricted. As a result, since the arm member can be mechanically maintained at the first position, the driving force of the driving means can be reduced (or released). As a result, the capacity of the driving means can be reduced and the energy consumption can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the guide groove of the arm member extends in a straight line.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the guide groove of the arm member extends in a straight line, so that after the arm member is arranged at the first position, the gear member is first When further rotated in the direction, the projecting pin of the gear member can be gradually pressed against the inner wall surface of the guide groove of the arm member. That is, it is possible to gradually absorb the gap between the arm shaft and the bearing or the gap between the projecting pin and the guide groove and press the arm member toward the first position.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, comprising: a case member in which the arm member and the gear shaft are disposed; and a rotational position detecting means that is disposed in the case member and detects a rotational position of the gear member, The gear member is disposed on the case member so as to be rotatable about the gear shaft, and has a gear body with teeth engraved on an outer peripheral surface thereof, and projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear main body. And a detected part detected by the rotational position detecting means, and the case member is erected from the case member toward the detected part and extends along a movement locus of the detected part. A gaming machine A6 comprising a restriction rib provided.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the inclination of the gear member can be effectively suppressed. That is, when the projecting pin of the gear member is moved along the guide groove of the arm member, the gear member is inclined by the action of the reaction force on the projecting pin that presses the inner wall surface of the guide groove. . In this case, according to the gaming machine A6, the restriction rib is provided on the case member so as to stand toward the detected portion of the gear member and extends along the movement locus of the detected portion. When is tilted, the detected portion can be received by the regulating rib. Thereby, while suppressing the increase in the rotational resistance of a gear member, the excessive inclination of a gear member can be avoided and the damage of the gear shaft or a tooth surface can be suppressed.

  In particular, the portion to be detected is a portion projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body, and the portion where displacement is maximized when the gear member is tilted. The excessive inclination of the gear member can be effectively suppressed. Furthermore, by setting the detected portion, which is a portion detected by the rotational position detecting means, as a portion that also serves as a stopper function that suppresses the inclination of the gear shaft, as described above, these two components can be used. Compared with the case where it is provided separately, it is possible to simplify the structure and reduce the cost of parts.

  In the gaming machine A6, a gap is formed between a standing tip of the restriction rib and a bottom surface of the detected portion facing the case member.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, a gap is formed between the standing tip of the regulating rib and the bottom surface of the detected portion facing the case member. When the reaction force acting on the projecting pin that presses the wall surface is small, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of contact resistance by maintaining a gap between the bottom surface of the detected portion and the standing tip of the regulating rib. . Thereby, the driving force required for the rotation of the gear member can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the detected part is formed by curving an edge of a bottom surface facing the case member in an arc shape.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the detected part is formed by curving the edge of the bottom surface facing the case member in an arc shape, which is caused by the inclination of the gear member. And when the bottom face of a to-be-detected part is contact | abutted to a regulation rib, it can suppress that the edge part of the bottom face of a to-be-detected part is caught in a regulation rib. Therefore, the gear member can be smoothly rotated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A8, the gear member is characterized in that the protruding pin is erected from the detected portion.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in any of the gaming machines A6 to A8, since the projecting pin is erected from the detected portion, the gear member rotates and the projecting pin is the guide groove of the arm member. When the projecting pin receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove, only the detected part that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body is partially tilted. Thus, the inclination of the gear body (gear shaft) can be easily suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that it rotates with the tooth surface of a gear main body, and the tooth surface of the other member which meshes with the tooth surface shifted | deviated, and rotation resistance becomes excessive and a tooth surface wears.

  In the gaming machine A9, the regulation rib of the case member is located radially outward from the base of the projecting pin when viewed in the axial direction on the gear shaft of the gear member.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the restriction rib of the case member is located radially outward from the base of the projecting pin in the axial direction of the gear shaft of the gear member. When the projecting pin receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove, the protruding tip side of the detected portion (that is, the portion closest to the case member) can be received by the regulating rib, and the inclination of the gear member Can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A10, the regulation rib of the case member extends to a rotational position where the detected portion of the gear member is detected by the rotational position detecting means. .

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A6 to A10, the restriction rib of the case member extends to the rotational position where the detected portion of the gear member is detected by the rotational position detecting means. Therefore, when the gear member is rotated while the projecting pin receives the reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove, the detected portion can be prevented from colliding with the rotational position detecting means. Thereby, the reliability of the rotation position detection of a gear member can be improved.

  A part of the outer surface of the cylindrical shaft-shaped body is a flat surface, and a D-shaped cross section formed in a D-shaped cross section and a circumferential groove recessed along the circumferential direction on the outer surface of the D-shaped cross section And a through hole formed in a D-shaped cross section by making a part of the inner surface of the circular hole a flat surface so that the D-shaped cross section of the shaft body can be inserted, The rotating body that rotates together with the shaft body by engaging the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section, and prevents the shaft body from coming out of the axial direction from the insertion hole of the rotating body. Therefore, in the gaming machine comprising a retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove, and a driving means for applying a rotational driving force to the shaft body or the rotating body, the rotating body is moved from the axial end surface to the shaft body. A gaming machine B1 comprising a protruding portion protruding along the line.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the D-shaped cross section of the shaft body is inserted into the insertion hole of the rotating body, and the retaining ring is inserted into the circumferential groove in the D-shaped end surface portion of the shaft body protruding from the axial end surface of the rotating body. By fitting, the shaft body is prevented from coming off in the axial direction from the insertion hole of the rotating body. In this case, since the projecting portion protrudes along the shaft body on the axial end surface of the rotating body, when the retaining ring is fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft body, the projecting portion and the retaining ring are Each tool can be locked with a tool such as pliers. That is, it is not necessary to lock the shaft body with a tool. Therefore, the retaining ring can be fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft body without damaging the shaft body. In particular, when the shaft body is made of brass, it is effective because it is easily damaged. Examples of the shaft body damage include a case where a flaw is formed on the surface of the shaft body and a case where the shaft center of the shaft body is bent.

  In the gaming machine B1, the protruding portion is located between opposing opening ends of a retaining ring fitted in a circumferential groove of the shaft body.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, it is possible to suppress the retaining ring from dropping from the circumferential groove of the shaft body.

  That is, there is a relative rotational position between the shaft body and the retaining ring where the engagement between the shaft body and the retaining ring is easily released, and when the relative rotational position is reached, the shaft body is pulled out from the insertion hole of the rotational body. If a load is applied to the retaining ring, the retaining ring may fall out of the circumferential groove of the shaft body.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, since the protrusion is located between the opening ends of the retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove of the shaft body, the opening end of the retaining ring is brought into contact with the protrusion. Thus, the relative rotation of the retaining ring with respect to the shaft body can be restricted. Therefore, by setting the position of the protrusion to an appropriate position, the relative rotational position of the shaft body and the retaining ring is maintained at an appropriate position, and the retaining ring is prevented from dropping from the circumferential groove of the shaft body. it can.

  In the gaming machine B2, a gaming machine B3 comprising engagement means for engaging a retaining ring with a circumferential groove of the shaft body.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, it is possible to improve the durability of the shaft body and the rotating body.

  That is, in the structure in which the rotational torque transmitted between the rotating body and the shaft body is received by the flat surface of the insertion hole in the rotating body and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section in the shaft body, the burden on these flat surfaces is large. The durability is reduced.

  On the other hand, since the gaming machine B3 includes an engaging means for engaging the retaining ring with the circumferential groove of the shaft body, the retaining ring is rotated together with the shaft body through the engagement by the engaging means. be able to. Thereby, not only the flat surface of the insertion hole in the rotating body and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section in the shaft body, but also the protrusion and stop in the rotating body are transmitted to the rotating torque transmitted between the rotating body and the shaft body. It can also be handled between the open ends of the ring. Thereby, rotational torque can be disperse | distributed and the improvement of the durability of a shaft body and a rotary body can be aimed at that much.

  Further, in order to increase the engagement area between the flat surfaces and improve the durability, the shaft body and the rotating body are increased in size and weight. However, according to the gaming machine B3, the shaft body is removed. Since it is a structure in which the retaining ring that plays a role as a stopper is also used for the role of bearing the rotational torque, it is possible to reduce the size and weight.

  In the gaming machine B3, the retaining ring includes an annular portion in which a part of the annular shape is cut out to form an open end, and a plurality of circumferential locations on the inner circumferential side of the annular portion, radially inward. The engagement means is formed on the engaged portion formed as a flat surface or a recess on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft body. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it engages at least one overhang portion of a retaining ring.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the retaining ring is formed as an E-shaped retaining ring in which a plurality of projecting portions are projected on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion, and the engaging means is Since at least one projecting portion of the retaining ring is engaged with the engaged portion formed as a flat surface or a recess on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft body, the retaining ring is inserted into the circumferential groove of the shaft body. Can be firmly engaged. That is, since the rotation torque can be reliably received by the engagement between the overhanging portion and the engaged portion, the durability of the shaft body and the rotation body can be improved, and the transmittable rotation torque can be increased. it can. Moreover, since a general-purpose component (E-type retaining ring) can be used as the retaining ring, the cost of the component can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, the engaged portion is formed as a flat surface or a concave portion on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove, so that the engagement between the circumferential groove of the shaft body and the retaining ring is achieved, and the size and weight are reduced. Can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine B4, the engaged portion formed on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft body is in a state where the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross-section are engaged with the protruding portion. A gaming machine B5 that is positioned 180 degrees out of phase.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the engaged portion formed on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft body is engaged with the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section. In this state, since the phase is 180 degrees different from that of the protrusion, the operation of engaging the protruding portion of the retaining ring and the engaged portion of the shaft body can be easily and reliably performed. That is, when the D-shaped cross section of the shaft body is inserted into the insertion hole of the rotating body and the D-shaped end surface portion of the shaft body protrudes from the axial end surface of the rotating body, Since the engaged part is located on the different side), the retaining ring fitting direction for positioning the protrusion between the opening ends of the retaining ring and the protruding part of the retaining ring are engaged with the shaft body. It is possible to match the fitting direction of the retaining ring for engaging with the portion. Therefore, the projecting portion and the retaining ring are locked with a tool such as pliers, and the retaining ring is engaged with the shaft body only by inserting the retaining ring into the circumferential groove of the shaft body. It can be easily and reliably engaged with the joint.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the protrusion is formed at a position that is in phase with a flat surface in the insertion hole of the rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the protrusion is formed at a position that is in phase with the flat surface in the insertion hole of the rotating body, so that the durability is improved. Can be planned. That is, in the rotating body, the portion where the flat surface is formed in the insertion hole is the thickest (thickness in the radial direction) and becomes a portion where the strength is ensured. Therefore, by forming the protrusion in the portion having the same phase as the flat surface in the insertion hole, it is possible to receive the load acting from the protrusion at the portion where the strength is ensured. Durability can be improved. In addition, if the position is in phase with the flat surface in the insertion hole, the cross-sectional area of the protrusion can be increased, so that the strength is ensured and the durability of the protrusion itself is improved. Can be planned.

  In the gaming machine B6, the protrusion includes a flat surface that is located on a side facing the shaft body and is formed to be continuous with the flat surface of the insertion hole, and the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the protrusion are The gaming machine B7 is configured to be engageable with a flat surface of a D-shaped cross section of the shaft body.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B6, the protrusion is provided with a flat surface that is located on the side facing the shaft body and formed continuously with the flat surface of the insertion hole, and the flat surface of the insertion hole. Since the flat surface of the projection and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section of the shaft body can be engaged, the engagement area between the flat surfaces can be increased by forming the flat surface on the projection. . As a result, it is possible to disperse the rotational torque and improve the durability of the shaft body and the rotating body accordingly.

  Further, in this way, the protrusion that contacts the opening end of the retaining ring and plays the role of suppressing the relative rotation of the retaining ring with respect to the shaft body is engaged with the flat surface in the D-shaped cross section of the shaft body. Thus, by sharing the role of handling rotational torque, it is possible to reduce the size and weight while improving the durability of the shaft body and the rotating body.

  According to any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, comprising: an arm member that is displaced about an arm axis; and a decorative member that is rotatably arranged on the arm member and functions as a decorative body, A gaming machine B8, wherein a rotating body, a retaining ring, and driving means are disposed on the arm member to rotate the decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the durability of the mechanism for rotating the decorative member is improved while inhibiting the displacement of the arm member from being inhibited. be able to. That is, the decorative member is large and heavy in order to obtain a function as a decorative body. Therefore, the mechanism for rotating the decorative member is required to have durability for receiving a large rotational torque, while the arm member is provided with an arm shaft. Therefore, it is required to suppress the inertial force by reducing the weight. In this case, as a mechanism for rotating the decorative member, by adopting the above-described shaft body, rotating body, retaining ring, and driving means, while ensuring durability to receive a large rotational torque, achieving a small size and light weight, The arm member can be smoothly displaced.

  In a gaming machine comprising a case member, an arm member arranged to be displaceable on the case member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the arm member to displace the arm member relative to the case member, A second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member; and a connecting member having one end pivotally supported by the second rotating member and the other end movably coupled to the case member. A gaming machine C1 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the driving force is applied from the driving unit, the arm member is displaced with respect to the case member. In this case, one end of the connecting member is pivotally supported by the second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and the other end of the connecting member is movably connected to the case member. When displaced with respect to the case member, the angle formed by the arm member and the connecting member (the straight line connecting the connecting position where one end of the connecting member is connected to the second rotating member and the arm shaft, and the second rotating member With the change in the angle between the connecting position where one end of the connecting member is connected and the straight line connecting the connecting position where the other end of the connecting member is connected to the case member, the second rotating member is made relative to the arm member. It can be displaced (rotated). That is, since the driving means for applying the driving force to the arm member can be used as the means for rotating the second rotating member, the driving means only for rotating the second rotating member can be dispensed with.

  In the gaming machine C1, a first rotating member that is rotatably arranged on the arm member, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the first rotating member to rotate the first rotating member with respect to the arm member. A gaming machine C2 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, a driving force is applied to the first rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and the first rotating member is rotated with respect to the arm member. Since the driving means is provided, the arm member is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means, and the second rotating member is rotated along with the displacement of the arm member and simultaneously the driving force applied from the driving means. Thus, the first rotating member can be rotated. That is, it is not necessary to provide driving means (total of three) for each of the arm member, the second rotating member, and the first rotating member, and the arm member, the second rotating member, and the first rotating member are driven by the two driving means. can do.

  In the gaming machine C2, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged coaxially.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged on the same axis, so that both the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arm members. It is possible to enhance the effect of production when the two are simultaneously rotated with the displacement.

  In the gaming machine C3, the second rotating member is disposed on the back side of the first rotating member.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the second rotating member is disposed on the back side (that is, the gaming board side) of the first rotating member. It can be avoided that the trajectory of the connecting member overlaps the first rotating member and a part of the first rotating member is hidden by the connecting member. That is, the entire first rotating member can be exposed during the displacement of the arm member.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the second rotating member and the first rotating member have the same rotating direction.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the second rotating member and the first rotating member have the same rotation direction, so that the second rotation is accompanied by the displacement of the arm member. When the member and the first rotating member are rotated at the same time, it is possible to give the player an impression that both of them rotate smoothly, and the effect of that effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine C5, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged coaxially and have different rotation speeds.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged on the same axis and have different rotational speeds. And the first rotating member) can be rotated at different rotational speeds in the same rotational direction while being displaced on the same locus along the displacement direction of the arm member. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of giving the player the impression that the two members (the second rotating member and the first rotating member) rotate smoothly.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the case member includes a guide groove extending in a groove shape, and the other end of the connection member is slidably connected to the case member via the guide groove. A gaming machine C7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the connecting member is slidably connected to the case member via the guide groove of the case member. Compared with a configuration in which the other end of the arm member is pivotally supported by the case member, the displaceable amount of the arm member can be further increased. In this case, if the displaceable amount of the arm member is increased, the rotatable amount of the second rotating member can be further increased. Therefore, when displacing the arm member, not only a rendering effect due to the displacement of the arm member itself but also a rendering effect due to the rotation of the second rotating member in accordance with the displacement can be enhanced.

  One of the gaming machines C1 to C7 includes a liquid crystal display device, and the arm member has a first position on the display area of the liquid crystal display device and a second position outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. The case member is formed along the outer edge of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and has an edge portion located on the displacement locus of the arm member, and the edge portion is a cross-sectional circle. A gaming machine C8 characterized by being curved in an arc.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the arm member from being hindered by the edge of the case member while securing the display area of the liquid crystal device.

  That is, in the configuration in which the arm member is displaced between the first position and the second position about the arm axis, the total length of the arm member becomes long, and therefore, when the arm member is displaced, in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the game board). It is easy for shaking to occur. Therefore, when the arm member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the arm member may collide with the edge of the case member and cause damage, or the arm member may be locked and displaced by the edge of the case member. There is a risk of disappearing. On the other hand, it is conceivable that the edge of the case member is not positioned on the displacement locus of the arm member. However, expanding the case member to the entire displacement region of the arm member means that the display region of the liquid crystal device is the case. Retracting the edge of the case member out of the displacement locus of the arm member cannot be performed because it is hidden by the member, because the wiring and board disposed on the back side of the case member are exposed and the appearance is impaired. I can't.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine C8, the edge portion that is formed along the outer edge of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and is located on the displacement locus of the arm member is formed to be curved in a cross-sectional arc shape. While securing an opening for exposing the display area of the liquid crystal device in the case member, when the arm member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the arm member that swings backward collides with the edge of the case member. In addition, the arm member can be guided by the curved arc of the cross section, and the shock can be buffered. Therefore, damage can be suppressed, and the arm member can be smoothly displaced by suppressing the arm member from being locked and stopped at the edge of the case member.

  In the gaming machine C8, the case member has a decorative shape formed adjacent to the edge portion.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C8, the case member is formed with a decorative shape adjacent to the edge of the case member, so that the edge is formed with a curved arc shape in cross section. Even if it is a case, it can be made to make a player recognize an edge part and a decoration shape as an integrated design without a sense of incongruity, and it can suppress that an edge part stands out unnaturally.

  The decorative shape means a shape formed on the front surface or the back surface of the case member. For example, a recess or a groove recessed on the front surface or the back surface, a protrusion or a stripe projecting on the front surface or the back surface, these Combinations are exemplified. The grooves and strips may be either linear or curved, or a combination thereof. The same applies to the gaming machine C11.

  In the gaming machine C9, the arm member displaces the front side of the case member, and the case member is formed of a light transmissive material, and the front surface is formed as a flat surface, and the decorative shape is A gaming machine C10 formed on the back surface.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the front surface of the case member to which the arm member is displaced is formed as a flat surface. Can be made. On the other hand, since the case member is formed of a light-transmitting material and the decorative shape is formed on the back surface, it is possible to ensure the effect of allowing the player to recognize the above-described edge portion and the decorative shape as an integrated design without a sense of incongruity. In addition, when the front surface of the case member is formed as a flat surface, the arm member slides easily so that scratches are easily formed. However, the decorative shape is formed on the back surface to make the scratches inconspicuous. Can do.

  In a gaming machine comprising a case member, an arm member arranged to be displaceable on the case member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the arm member to displace the arm member relative to the case member, The gaming machine D1, wherein the case member includes a first case portion in which the arm member is disposed and a second case portion detachably connected to the first case portion.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the case member includes the first case portion in which the arm member is disposed and the second case portion that is detachably connected to the first case portion. The case member can be diverted efficiently.

  That is, for example, when changing the disposition position of the arm member in accordance with the change of the displacement form of the arm member, it is useless to change the entire case member even though it is not necessary to change other parts. Similarly, when changing other parts, it is useless to change the entire case member even though it is not necessary to change the position of the arm member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the case member is divided into the first case portion where the arm member is disposed and the second case portion detachably connected to the first case portion, Only one of the first case part or the second case part needs to be changed according to the contents of the change, and the other of the first case part or the second case part can be used, so the case member for other models Can be used efficiently.

  In the gaming machine D1, the case member has a decorative shape formed in the second case portion, the gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the case member has a decorative shape formed on the second case portion, so that the case member can be efficiently used for other models. .

  That is, it is useless to change the entire case member even when the arrangement position of the arm member is changed in accordance with the change of the displacement form of the arm member, although it is not necessary to change the decorative shape. Similarly, when the decorative shape is changed, it is useless to change the entire case member even though it is not necessary to change the arrangement position of the arm member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, since the case member is divided into the first case portion where the arm member is disposed and the second case portion where the decorative shape is formed, It is only necessary to change one of the first case part or the second case part, and the other of the first case part or the second case part can be diverted, so the case member can be efficiently used for other models. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the case member includes a metal back plate member attached to the back side of the first case part and the second case part, and the first case part or the second case part One of the gaming machines D3 includes a protruding plate portion that protrudes outward and is sandwiched between the other of the first case portion or the second case portion and the back plate member.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in the gaming machine D1 or D2, the case member is connected by the metal back plate member to which the first case portion and the second case portion are attached to the back side thereof. The rigidity of the case member as a whole can be secured by strengthening the connection between the first case part and the second case part. Furthermore, one of the first case portion and the second case portion includes a protruding plate portion protruding outward, and the protruding plate portion is the other of the first case portion or the second case portion and the back plate member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the rigidity of the entire case portion while achieving simplification and downsizing of the structure by utilizing the overlap of the plate-like bodies.

  In the gaming machine D3, a gaming wall D4 is characterized in that a positioning wall located along the outer shape of the protruding plate portion is formed on the other back surface of the first case portion or the second case portion.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, a positioning wall is formed on the other back surface of the first case part or the second case part along the outer shape of the protruding plate part. Before mounting the back plate member, when the protruding plate portion protruding from one of the first case portion or the second case portion is disposed on the other back surface of the first case portion or the second case portion, the protruding plate The part can be positioned by the positioning wall. Therefore, the workability at the time of assembling the case member can be improved.

  In addition, the positioning wall does not need to be continuously formed along the outer shape of the protruding plate portion, and may be formed intermittently. That is, the positioning wall does not need to be provided on the entire outer shape of the protruding plate portion, and the positioning wall only needs to be partially scattered with respect to the outer shape of the protruding plate portion.

  In the gaming machine D4, a protruding height of the positioning wall is equal to a thickness dimension of the protruding plate portion, and a protruding front end surface of the positioning wall is a seating surface that receives a back plate member. A gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the protruding front end surface of the positioning wall serves as a seating surface that receives the back plate member, and accordingly, the back plate member and the first case portion or the second case portion The contact area between the other of the case portions can be increased, and the coupling between the two can be strengthened. Thereby, the rigidity as the whole case part can be improved.

  In the gaming machines D1 to D5, a second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, one end pivotally supported on the second rotating member, and the other end connected to the second case portion so as to be displaceable. A gaming machine D6, comprising: a connecting member to be operated.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D5, one end of the connecting member is pivotally supported by the second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and the other end of the connecting member Is movably connected to the second case member, so that when the arm member is displaced relative to the case member, an angle formed by the arm member and the connecting member (one end of the connecting member is connected to the second rotating member). A straight line connecting the connecting position and the arm shaft, and a straight line connecting the connecting position where one end of the connecting member is connected to the second rotating member and the connecting position where the other end of the connecting member is connected to the second case member. The second rotating member can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the arm member with a change in the angle formed. That is, since the driving means for applying the driving force to the arm member can be used as the means for rotating the second rotating member, the arm member can be mounted without providing the driving means for rotating the second rotating member. With only one driving means for displacing, two operations of displacement of the arm member and rotation of the second rotating member can be achieved.

  In this case, since the other end of the connecting member is displaceably disposed in the second case portion, the distance between the arm shaft of the arm member and the other end of the connecting member can be increased. Thereby, the displacement effect of an arm member can be enlarged and the presentation effect by displacing the arm member can be heightened.

  The connection member and the case member need only be connected to the case member so that the other end of the connection member is displaceable. Therefore, when the arm member is changed, or in addition to this, the connection member is changed. Even in this case, the second case part can be used as it is with relative ease. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the other end of the connecting member is connected to the second case portion instead of the first case portion in this way, efficient use of the case member to other models and displacement of the arm member It is possible to achieve both a quantity expansion.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, gaming machines B1 to B8, gaming machines C1 to C10 and gaming machines D1 to D6, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, the gaming machines B1 to B8, the gaming machines C1 to C10, and the gaming machines D1 to D6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, gaming machines B1 to B8, gaming machines C1 to C10 or gaming machines D1 to D6, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine E3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
400 Case member 410 1st base body (a part of case member, 1st case part)
413 Regulating rib 415 Seat wall (positioning wall)
430 2nd base body (2nd case part)
431 Guide groove 433 Edge 434 Projection plate 450 Back plate member 500 First arm (arm member)
511a Guide groove 520 Arm shaft 531 Drive motor (drive means)
533 Wheel gear (rotating body)
533a Flat surface (flat surface of insertion hole)
533b Insertion hole 533e Projection 533e1 Flat surface (Flat surface of the projection)
534, 2534, 3534 Retaining ring 534a Open end 534b Ring portion 534c Overhang portion 2534c, 3534c Overhang portion 540 First rotating decorative body (decorative member, first rotating member)
542 Shaft body 542a Flat surface (flat surface of D-shaped cross section)
542b D-shaped cross section 542c Circumferential grooves 2542d, 3542d Engagement portion 550 Second rotating decorative body (second rotating member)
600 Second arm (connecting member)
700 gear member 710 gear body 720 detected portion 730 projecting pin 790 gear shaft 900 drive motor (drive means)
L1 Straight line connecting the projecting pin and the arm shaft L2 Straight line connecting the projecting pin and the gear shaft Angle S formed by the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 Rotational position detection sensor (rotational position detection means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a gear member having teeth cut on the outer periphery and an insertion hole formed in the center thereof, and a shaft body inserted into the insertion hole of the gear member. A structure is known in which rotational torque can be transmitted between a gear member and a shaft body by utilizing engagement between flat surfaces provided on an inner surface and an outer surface of the shaft body .

JP 2012-115580 A

However, there is a problem that the shaft body may be damaged by being locked by the arm of the tool during the fitting operation .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing damage to a shaft body .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a cross-sectional portion in which a flat surface parallel to the axial direction is formed on a part of the outer surface of the cylindrical shaft-shaped body, and the outer surface of the cross-sectional portion along the circumferential direction. And a shaft body having a circumferential groove that is recessed, and an insertion hole in which a flat surface parallel to the axial direction is formed on a part of the inner surface of the circular hole so that a cross-section of the shaft body can be inserted. Then, the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the cross-sectional portion engage with each other, so that the rotating body that rotates together with the shaft body and the shaft body from coming out of the axial direction from the insertion hole of the rotating body are prevented. Therefore , a retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove and a driving means for applying a rotational driving force to the shaft body or the rotating body are provided, and the rotating body is attached to the retaining ring of the rotating body. Protruding portions are provided so as to protrude along the insertion direction of the shaft body from the axial end face on the opposite side .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect , the retaining ring can be fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft body without damaging the shaft body .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine, and shows a state where the first arm and the second arm of the arm operation unit are arranged at the first position. It is a perspective view of an arm operation unit in the state where the 1st arm and the 2nd arm are arranged in the 1st position. It is a perspective view of an arm operation unit in the state where the 1st arm and the 2nd arm are arranged in the 1st position. It is a perspective view of an arm operation unit in the state where the 1st arm and the 2nd arm are arranged in the 2nd position. It is a perspective view of an arm operation unit in the state where the 1st arm and the 2nd arm are arranged in the 2nd position. (A) is a front perspective view of the first arm, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the first arm. (A) is the front perspective view which expanded partially by making the front end side of a 1st arm into an exploded state, (b) is the back perspective view which expanded partially by making the front end side of a 1st arm into an exploded state. is there. It is a partial expanded rear view in the container of a 1st arm. It is a partial expansion perspective view in the connection part of the wheel gear of a rotation mechanism, and the shaft of a 1st rotation decoration body. (A) is a top view of the shaft body, (b) is a front view of the shaft body in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is an arrow XIVc in FIG. 14 (a). It is a side view of the shaft body in the direction view, (d) is a top view of the wheel gear, (e) is a cross-sectional view of the wheel gear along the XIVe-XIVe line of FIG. ) Is a front view of the wheel gear as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVf in FIG. 14D, and FIG. 14G is a top view of the retaining ring. (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged top view of a wheel gear. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a rotation mechanism. (A) is a front perspective view of the second arm, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the second arm. It is a front perspective view of a gear member, a reduction gear, and a drive motor in the state where it was attached to the 1st base body. It is a front view of the gear member in the state where the 1st arm was connected. (A) is a front view of a gear member, (b) is a side view of the gear member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 20 (a), and (c) is an XXc− in FIG. 20 (a). It is sectional drawing of the gear member in the XXc line. (A) is a front view of a 1st base body, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st base body in the XXIb-XXIb line | wire of Fig.21 (a). (A) is a front view of the 1st arm and 2nd arm and gear member which are arrange | positioned in a 1st position, (b) is a part of the 1st arm and gear member in the XXIIb part of Fig.22 (a) It is an enlarged front view. (A) is a front view of the first arm, the second arm, and the gear member in a state where the gear member is reversely rotated from the state shown in FIG. 22 (a), and (b) is a front view of FIG. It is the elements on larger scale of the 1st arm and gear member in a XXIIIb part. (A) is a front view of the 1st arm and 2nd arm and gear member which are arrange | positioned in a 2nd position, (b) is a part of the 1st arm and gear member in the XXIVb part of Fig.24 (a) It is an enlarged front view. (A) is a front view of the first arm, the second arm, and the gear member in a state where the gear member is rotated forward from the state shown in FIG. 24 (a), and (b) is a front view of FIG. 25 (a). It is a partial expanded front view of the 1st arm and gear member in a XXVb part. (A) is a front view of a 2nd base body, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd base in the XXVIb-XXVIb line | wire of Fig.26 (a). It is a disassembled back perspective view of a case body. (A) is a partially enlarged rear view of the second protrusion, (b) is a side view of the second protrusion in the direction of arrow XXVIIIb in FIG. 28 (a), and (c) is a side view of FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view of the second protrusion along the line XXVIIIc-XXVIIIc. (A) is a front view of the shaft body and the retaining ring in the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the shaft body and the retaining ring along the line XXIXb-XXIXb in FIG. () Is a front view of a shaft body and a retaining ring in the third embodiment, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the shaft body and the retaining ring taken along line XXIXd-XXIXd in FIG. 29 (c).

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 28, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower dish 50 is placed below the lower dish 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1). (See below). The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 on the front surface of the game board 13 and a resin arc member (not shown) formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. This is a substantially circular region (region in which a winning opening or the like is provided and the launched ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. Further, in the state of the pachinko machine 10, a resin formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end portion of the outer rail 62. The made circular arc member is in contact with and fixed to the base plate 60.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba and a 7-segment display 37Bb which are light emitting means.

  The first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state by a lighting state, indicates whether or not it is fluctuating by a lighting state, and a stop pattern is definitely changed. Whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot, the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or the off symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, lottery is performed when the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are entered. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot is ended, that is, when the probability is changing (probability is changing), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special gaming state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and a ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. Also, the short-time state (mid-time) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second entrance It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) that is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only the chance of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, which is longer than normal Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared with a case where the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to sphere. Thus, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640a is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count which the electrically-driven accessory 640a opens rather than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count to do. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per time is not shown. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a first entry port 64 and a second entry port 640 as a trigger (start winning prize) as a trigger while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display units 37A and 37B. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays three symbols in a variable manner, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol with the passage of a ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A configured second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a period of time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities to open the electric combination 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the time reduction.

  It should be noted that the second entrance 640 may be changed during the probability change or in a short time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or in the time reduction, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set to be shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball flowing down to the right of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. . When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays the variation, and if the winning lottery result is a win, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result is out of place. For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of 4 times, and the number of spheres retained is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above and also lit on the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. You may make it carry out using a part of apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol hold lamp may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a jackpot, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second entrance 640 through which a sphere can enter is disposed below the first entrance 64 in front view. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances for paying out 5 balls as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640, for example, The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 is three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 is five. May be.

  The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the time reduction, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is also short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of a big hit between when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second entrance 640 is low or high. Are the same. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is that the ball enters the first slot 64 when the ball enters the second slot 640. It is set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second entrance 640 and is in a state in which a ball can always enter.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory The ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and the chance to win a lottery is increased by entering the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during probability change and time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and is easy to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to be electrically driven. It is advantageous for the player to set the position to the open state and aim for a 15R probability variation big hit by entering the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is being probable, shorting, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 becomes a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed, The LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a big hit is generated. Indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And both. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37Aa and LED 37Ba corresponding to the jackpot are turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins into the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is opened. You may make it form as a special game state. Further, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and a plurality (for example, two) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first entrance 64, for example, a variable display device unit. The left side of 80 is also acceptable.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 are provided at the center and right corner on the lower side of the game board 13 for adhering stamps and identification labels, etc. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the frame 14.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 executes main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To do.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a front with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the side, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To do.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a to have a launch strength according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and shows a state in which the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 of the arm operation unit 300 are arranged at the first position.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the arm operation unit 300 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13 (the back side in FIG. 5), and the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are moved between the first position and the second position. It is formed to be displaceable between them.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are projected toward the center of the game board 13 in the first position, and the first rotary ornament 540 and the second rotary ornament 550 are the first ones. The first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are retracted to the side of the third symbol display device 81 and retracted to the rear side of the game board 13 in the second position while being arranged at the front center of the three symbol display device 81. Is done. In connection with this, the 1st rotation decoration body 540 and the 2nd rotation decoration body 550 are made invisible to a player (refer FIG. 2).

  Next, the detailed configuration of the arm operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  6 and 7 are perspective views of the arm operation unit 300 in a state in which the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are disposed at the first position, and FIGS. 8 and 9 illustrate the first arm 500 and the second arm 500, respectively. It is a perspective view of arm operation unit 300 in the state where arm 600 was arranged in the 2nd position. 7 and 9 illustrate a state where the first cover body 420 and the second cover body 440 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, the arm operation unit 300 includes a box-shaped first base body 410 that is open on one surface side, and is fastened and fixed to one surface side of the first base body 410. A first cover body 420 that closes the open portion, a second base body 430 that is detachably connected to the first base body 410 and that is open on one side, and one surface of the second base body 430 And a second cover body 440 that closes and fixes the open portion (box-shaped portion) of the second base body 430, and the case member 400 is formed by these members 410, 420, 430, and 440. Each member 410, 420, 430, 440 is formed of a light transmissive material.

  The case member 400 includes a first arm 500 and a second arm 600, a gear member 700 connected to the first arm 500, and a drive motor 900 that applies a rotational driving force to the gear member 700 via a reduction gear 800. Are arranged.

  The first arm 500 is pivotally supported by the first base body 410 and the first cover body 420 via the arm shaft 520, and the first position (see FIGS. 6 and 7) and the first position around the arm shaft 520. It can be displaced between two positions (FIGS. 8 and 9). Here, the first arm 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16.

  FIG. 10A is a front perspective view of the first arm 500, and FIG. 10B is a rear perspective view of the first arm 500. FIG. 11A is a front perspective view partially enlarged with the distal end side of the first arm 500 in an exploded state. FIG. 11B is a partial perspective view with the distal end side of the first arm 500 in an exploded state. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the first arm 500 includes a main body member 510 formed of a resin material, an arm shaft 520 that rotatably supports the main body member 510 on the first base body 410, and the main body portion 510. A rotation mechanism 530 disposed on the distal end side, a first rotation decoration body 540 rotated by the rotation mechanism 530, and a second rotation decoration body 550 disposed on the back side of the first rotation decoration body 540. With.

  The main body member 510 includes a connection-side main body 511, a swing-side main body 512 connected to the end of the connection-side main body 511, and an end of the swing-side main body 512 opposite to the connection-side main body 511. The connection side main body 511, the rocking | swiveling side main body 512, and the storage body 513 are integrally formed from the resin material.

  The connection side main body 511 is a part formed in the shape of a long flat plate, and a guide groove 511a opened in the plate surface extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the connection side main body 511. The projecting pin 730 of the gear member 700 is inserted into the guide groove 511a (see FIG. 19), and the connection-side main body 511 and the gear member 700 are connected via the guide groove 511a and the projecting pin 730.

  The connection-side main body 511 is provided with a wall portion 511b which is continuous along the outer edge of the flat plate portion and the inner edge of the guide groove 511a and is formed in a rectangular rib shape in cross section. Thereby, since the rigidity of the connection side main body 511 improves, it can suppress that the connection side main body 511 twists and deform | transforms when the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a is pressed by the protruding pin 730. Therefore, the projecting pin 730 of the gear member 700 can be smoothly moved along the guide groove 511a. Further, by providing the wall portion 511b along the outer edge of the flat plate shape and the inner edge of the guide groove 511a in this way, the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a is achieved while ensuring both rigidity and weight reduction of the connection side body 511. Thus, the pressure receiving area that is pressed against the projecting pin 730 can be secured. As a result, the durability of the connection-side main body 511 and the gear member 700 (projecting pin 730) can be improved.

  The swing side main body 512 is formed in a shape in which a side connected to the connection side main body 511 is curved in an arc shape and a side opposite to the connection side main body 511 is bent in a dogleg shape. The arm shaft 520 is integrally formed at a connection portion between the swing side main body 512 and the connection side main body 511, and vertically extends from the flat plate-like portions of the connection side main body 511 and the swing side main body 512 toward the back side. Established.

  Here, the swing-side main body 512 is continuous with the flat plate-like portion formed in a flat plate shape parallel to the flat plate-like portion of the connection-side main body 511 and the outer edge of the flat plate-like portion, and is erected from the flat plate-like portion. A rectangular box-shaped hollow box having an internal space is formed from a base having a rectangular cross-section wall portion and a flat plate body fastened and fixed to the standing tip side of the wall portion of the base body. .

  As a result, the drive motor 900 for displacing the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 while reducing the weight of the oscillating side main body 512 while securing the section coefficient of the oscillating side main body 512 to make it difficult to bend and deform. Can be reduced. Therefore, since the length dimension of the rocking | swiveling side main body 512 can be lengthened more, the moving amount of the front decoration body 540 etc. accompanying the displacement of the 1st arm 500 can be enlarged, and an effect can be heightened.

  Further, since the swinging side body 512 is formed in a hollow box shape, electrical wiring (power supply line, signal line, etc., not shown) of the rotation mechanism 530 is routed using the internal space ( Wiring). Thereby, damage to the electrical wiring can be suppressed. In particular, in this embodiment, after the electrical wiring of the rotation mechanism 530 is passed through the internal space of the swing side main body 512, the end of the swing side main body 512 (that is, the connection with the coupling side main body 511). A portion where the arm shaft 520 is formed). Since the arm shaft 520 is the center of rotation of the first arm 500 and is a portion where the displacement of the first arm 500 is minimized, the electrical wiring can be taken out from the vicinity of the arm shaft 520, so that the electrical It is possible to improve the durability of the wiring extraction portion.

  The container 513 is disposed on the distal end side of the swing side main body 512 (that is, the end opposite to the end connected to the coupling side main body 511), and is formed in a circular cylinder in front view. A rotating mechanism 530 that applies a rotational driving force to the first rotating decorative body 540 is disposed in the internal space. The detailed configuration of the rotation mechanism 530 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The container 513 includes a large-diameter portion 513a to which the swing side main body 512 is connected to the outer peripheral surface, a small-diameter portion 513b having an outer peripheral surface smaller in diameter than the large-diameter portion 513a, the large-diameter portion 513a and the small-diameter portion 513b. And a step portion 513c formed as a flat end surface perpendicular to the axis, and the second main body 551 of the second rotating decorative body 550 is rotatably fitted around the small diameter portion 513b.

  The first rotating decorative body 540 is a member that is disposed on the distal end side (container 513) of the first arm 500 and performs an effect by rotation, and includes a disk-shaped first main body 541 and the first main body 541. A shaft-shaped shaft body 542 located at the center and protruding from the back surface side, and a first decoration portion 543 that decorates the front surface side of the first main body 541 are provided. When a rotational driving force is applied to the shaft body 542 from the rotation mechanism 530, the first rotation decoration body 540 (first decoration portion 543) is relatively rotated with respect to the housing body 513 (first arm 500).

  In the present embodiment, the first decorative portion 543 is formed on the front surface side of the first main body 541 as a form in which a plurality of tapered acute-angled bodies spread radially outward from the center toward the radially outer side. The first decorative portion 543 is partially formed of a light transmissive material on the front side, so that light emitted from an LED (not shown) disposed therein can be visually recognized.

  The second rotating decorative body 550 is a member that is arranged coaxially with the shaft body 542 on the back side of the first rotating decorative body 540 and that produces an effect by rotation. The flat extension part 552 extended toward the radial direction outward from the outer peripheral side of 2 main body 551, and the 2nd decoration part 553 which decorates the outer peripheral side of the 2nd main body 551 are provided. An end of a second arm 600 described later is rotatably connected to the extended tip of the extended portion 552 (see FIG. 17).

  As described above, the second rotating decorative body 550 is rotatably supported by the container 513 by fitting the second main body 551 to the small diameter portion 513b of the container 513. In this case, in a state where the shaft body 542 of the first rotating decoration body 540 is connected to the rotation mechanism 530, the second rotating decoration body 550 (second main body 551) is connected to the first main body 541 of the first rotation decoration body 540. Movement in the axial direction is restricted between the back surface and the step portion 513c of the container 513. That is, the second rotating decorative body 550 is held rotatably between the first rotating decorative body 540 and the container 513.

  In addition, since the 2nd rotation decoration body 550 is arrange | positioned at the back side (namely, game board 13 side) of the 1st rotation decoration body 540, with the displacement of the 1st arm 500 and the 2nd arm 600, it is 1st. The trajectory of the two arms 600 or the extended portion 552 overlaps with the first rotating decorative body 540, and a part of the first decorative portion 543 of the first rotating decorative body 540 is prevented from being hidden by the second arm 600 or the extending portion 552. it can. That is, while the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced, the entire first rotation decoration pair 540 (first decoration portion 543) can be exposed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16, a rotation mechanism 530 and a connection structure between the rotation mechanism 530 and the shaft body 542 of the first rotation decoration body 540 will be described. FIG. 12 is a partially enlarged rear view of the housing 513 of the first arm 500. FIG. 13 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a connecting portion between the wheel gear 533 of the rotating mechanism 530 and the shaft 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540. FIG. In FIG. 13, illustration of the first main body 541 and the first decorative portion 543 of the first rotating decorative body 540 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the rotation mechanism 530 is engaged with a drive motor 531 that generates a rotational drive force, a worm gear 532 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 531, and the worm gear 532. A wheel gear 533 into which the shaft body 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540 is inserted, and a retaining ring 534 functioning as a retaining member for the shaft body 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540 inserted into the wheel gear 533. Prepare. The worm gear 532 is formed as a worm (screw gear), and the wheel gear 533 is formed as a worm wheel (helical gear).

  The wheel gear 533 is disposed at the central portion of the housing body 513, and the shaft body 542 of the first rotary decorative body 540 is inserted into the insertion hole 533 b (see FIG. 14) of the wheel gear 533 from the front side of the housing body 513. It is inserted (see FIG. 11). The shaft body 542 inserted into the wheel gear 533 is restricted from coming out from the insertion hole 533 b of the wheel gear 533 in the axial direction by fitting the retaining ring 534 into the circumferential groove 542 c of the shaft body 542.

  With reference to FIG. 14, the detailed structure of the shaft body 542 and the wheel gear 533 of the 1st rotation decoration body 540 is demonstrated. 14 (a) is a top view of the shaft body 542, FIG. 14 (b) is a front view of the shaft body 542 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. It is a side view of the shaft body 542 in the arrow XIVc direction view of Fig.14 (a). 14 (d) is a top view of the wheel gear 533, FIG. 14 (e) is a cross-sectional view of the wheel gear 533 along the line XIVe-XIVe of FIG. 14 (d), and FIG. It is a front view of the wheel gear 533 in the arrow XIVf direction view of FIG.14 (d). FIG. 14G is a top view of the retaining ring 534.

  As shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the shaft body 542 has a cylindrical shaft-shaped body (that is, a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section) with a part of the outer surface in the axial direction (FIG. 14B and FIG. 14C). A flat surface 542a which is a plane parallel to the vertical direction of FIG. 14 (c) is formed into a D-shaped cross section 542b formed in a D-shaped cross section, and the outer surface of the D-shaped cross section b is along the circumferential direction. And a circumferential groove 542c having a U-shaped cross section that is continuously recessed, and is made of a brass material.

  The flat surface 542a is formed within a predetermined range from the axial end surface (upper surface) of the shaft body 542 along the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 14B). That is, the flat surface 542a is also formed on the distal end side (upper surface side) of the shaft body 542 with respect to the circumferential groove 542c. In addition, the axial direction front-end | tip of the shaft body 542 (D-shaped cross-section part 542b) is made into a tapered shape by chamfering a corner (C surface processing). Thereby, the insertion operation to the insertion hole 533b can be performed smoothly.

  As shown in FIGS. 14D to 14F, the wheel gear 533 includes a cylindrical base portion 533c having an insertion hole 533b at the center, and a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the base portion 533c. Gear portion 533d and a projection portion 533e protruding in the axial direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 14 (e) and 14 (f)) from the axial end surface of the base portion 533c, and is formed from a resin material. The

  The insertion hole 533b is a flat surface 533a in which a part of the inner surface of the circular hole having a circular cross section is a flat surface parallel to the axial direction so that the D-shaped cross section 542b of the shaft body 542 can be inserted. It is formed in a D-shaped cross section. As a result, when the D-shaped cross section 542b of the shaft body 542 is inserted into the insertion hole 533b, the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542 and the flat surface 533a of the insertion hole 532b are engaged with each other, whereby the shaft body 542 and the hole gear are engaged. The drive torque can be transmitted to the 533.

  The protrusion 533e has a step in the state where the shaft body 542 is inserted into the insertion hole 533b to the limit position (that is, the end of the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542 (the lower end in FIG. 14B)). In the state of being in contact with the end face in the axial direction (the lower side face in FIG. 14 (e)), the projecting height is set to project from the upper face of the shaft body 542 in the axial direction (see FIG. 13).

  In addition, a flat surface 533e1 that is a plane parallel to the axial direction is formed on the projection portion 533e on the insertion hole 533b side (that is, the side facing the shaft body 542), and the flat surface 533e1 formed on the projection portion 533e. Is formed continuously with the flat surface 533a formed in the insertion hole 533b (that is, on the same plane). Accordingly, the flat surface 533e1 formed on the protrusion 533e and the flat surface 533a formed on the insertion hole 533b can be simultaneously engaged with the flat surface 542a formed on the D-shaped cross-section 542b of the shaft body 542. The

  On the other hand, the protrusion 533e is formed such that the back surface (outer peripheral surface, right side surface in FIG. 14D) opposite to the flat surface 533e1 is continuous with the outer peripheral surface of the base body portion 533c. As will be described later, the protrusion 533e is a portion that receives a load when the retaining ring 534 is mounted or when rotational torque is transmitted between the shaft body 542 and the wheel gear 533, and thus durability is ensured. There is a need to. Therefore, the protrusion 533e is formed at a position that is in phase with the flat surface 533a in the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533.

  That is, in the wheel gear 533, the base portion 533c has the thickest thickness (the radial direction (FIG. 14 (d) and FIG. 14 (e) left-right direction) in the portion where the flat surface 533a is formed in the insertion hole 533b. Strength). Therefore, the protrusion 533e is formed at a portion of the insertion hole 533b that is in phase with the flat surface 533a, so that the load acting from the protrusion 533e can be received at a thick portion where the strength is ensured. Therefore, the durability of the wheel member 533 can be improved. In addition, since the cross-sectional area of the protrusion 533e can be increased if it is in the same phase as the flat surface 533a in the insertion hole 533b, the strength is ensured and the protrusion 533e itself is durable. It is possible to improve the performance.

  As shown in FIG. 14G, the retaining ring 534 includes an annular portion 534b in which an opening end 534a is formed by cutting out a part of the annular shape, and a circumferential direction on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion 534b. It is formed as an E-type retaining ring that includes a projecting portion 534c that projects from three locations inward in the radial direction. The retaining ring 534 is manufactured by punching out the E shape shown in FIG. 14 (g) from a stainless steel plate and performing heat treatment such as quenching and tempering. However, the retaining ring 534 may be formed of a steel material or an aluminum alloy material.

  The three projecting portions 534c have concentric arcs at the projecting tips, and the virtual circle formed by connecting the projecting tips is slightly smaller than the diameter of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft 542. The Therefore, when the retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542, the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c in the shaft body 542 is pressed by the arcuate projecting tip of the projecting portion 534c in the retaining ring 534. . That is, until the pressing force is exceeded, the retaining ring 534 can be rotated together with the shaft body 542 by the projecting tip of the projecting portion 534c being in close contact with the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c (from the shaft body 542). Rotational torque can be transmitted to the protrusion 533e via the retaining ring 534).

  With reference to FIG. 15, the process of connecting the shaft body 542 of the 1st rotation decoration body 540 to the rotation mechanism 530 is demonstrated. FIGS. 15A to 15C are partially enlarged top views of the wheel gear 533.

  15A shows a state before the retaining ring 534 is attached to the shaft body 542, and FIG. 15B shows a state after the retaining ring 534 is attached to the shaft body 542. . FIG. 15C is a reference diagram of the rotation mechanism 530, and shows a form in which the protrusion 533e is omitted. 15A to 15C schematically show a state in which the distance between the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542 is enlarged.

  In the step of connecting the shaft body 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540 to the rotating mechanism 530, first, the first rotating decorative body 540 is attached to the front side of the housing body 513 with the second rotating decorative body 550 interposed ( FIG. 11). As a result, the D-shaped cross-section 542b of the shaft body 542 of the first rotating decorative body 540 inserted through the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533 is the end surface in the axial direction of the wheel gear 533 (upper surface, FIG. The retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c formed in the D-shaped end surface portion 542b.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, the retaining ring 534 is placed on the opposite side of the protruding portion 533e (with a phase of 180 relative to the protruding portion 533e) with the opening end 534a side facing the shaft body 542. The retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542 as shown in FIG. 15 (b) by using a radio pliers and arranged on the different sides) (see FIG. 13).

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, one arm of the radio pliers is locked to the back surface (the surface opposite to the flat surface 533 e 1) of the projection 533 e and the other arm of the radio pliers is locked to the retaining ring 534. The retaining ring 534 can be fitted into the circumferential groove 542c by locking the back surface side (the side opposite to the opening end 534a) and bringing these one and other arms close to each other.

  That is, since the shaft body 542 is not directly locked by the arm of the radio pliers, it is possible to prevent the surface of the shaft body 542 from being damaged or the shaft body 542 from being bent (the axis is bent). In particular, the shaft body 542 is made of a brass material, and is easily plastically deformed. Further, since the protrusion 533e is formed integrally with the wheel gear 533, that is, formed of a resin material, it is possible to make it difficult to slide the arm of the locked radio pliers. Therefore, the workability at the time of fitting the retaining ring 534 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 15B, in the state where the retaining ring 534 is attached to the shaft body 542, the protrusion 533e is positioned between the opening ends 534a of the retaining ring 534, so that the retaining ring 534 is the shaft body. It is possible to suppress the 542 from being removed from the circumferential groove 542c.

  Here, in the shaft body 542 (D-shaped stepped surface portion 542b), there is a region where the recessed depth of the circumferential groove 542c is reduced by the formation of the flat surface 542a. That is, there is a relative rotational position between the D-shaped cross-section 542b and the retaining ring 534 that is easily disengaged from each other, and at the relative rotational position, the inner wall surface of the overhanging portion 534c and the circumferential groove 542c. The engagement allowance is reduced. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 15C as a reference example, in the state where the protrusion 533e is not provided and the retaining ring 534 is rotatable relative to the shaft body 542, the tension of the retaining ring 534 is increased. A relative rotational position in which the protruding portion 534c is located on the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542 can be formed, and at this relative rotational position, as a whole, an engagement allowance between the protruding portion 534c and the inner wall surface of the circumferential groove 542c is reduced. Decrease. Therefore, when the load on the shaft body 542 is applied in the direction of coming out of the insertion hole 533b of the wheel gear 533, the retaining ring 534 may fall off from the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542 in the axial direction. Further, at such a relative rotational position, there is a possibility that the retaining ring 534 may fall off when another member or the like comes into contact with the retaining ring 534 even if no load is applied to the shaft body 542 in the direction of coming out.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the protrusion 533e is positioned between the opening ends 534a of the retaining ring 534 fitted in the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542, so that the opening end 534a of the retaining ring 534 is located. Can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 533e, and the relative rotation of the retaining ring 534 with respect to the shaft body 542 can be suppressed. As a result, the relative rotational position of the shaft body 542 and the retaining ring 534 can be maintained at an appropriate position, so that the retaining ring 534 can be prevented from dropping from the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542.

  Next, a connection structure between the rotation mechanism 530 (the wheel gear 533) and the shaft body 542 of the first rotation decoration body 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) and 16 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the rotation mechanism 530. FIG. 16 (a) shows a state before the shaft body 542 is rotated with respect to the wheel gear 533 in FIG. In (b), the state after the shaft body 542 is rotated with respect to the wheel gear 533 is illustrated.

  16A and 16B, in order to facilitate understanding of the relative rotation state of the wheel gear 533 and the shaft body 542, a gap between the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 and the flat surface 542a is used. A schematic enlarged view is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, in the wheel gear 533, not only the flat surface 533a is formed in the insertion hole 533b, but also the flat surface 533e1 connected to the flat surface 533a is formed in the protrusion 533e. Thus, both of the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 can be engaged with the flat surface 542a in the D-shaped cross section 542b of the shaft body 542 (see FIG. 14). That is, since the flat surface 533e1 is formed on the protrusion 533e, the engagement area of the shaft body 542 with the flat surface 542a can be increased, and the rotational torque can be dispersed accordingly. As a result, durability of the shaft body 542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved.

  Further, as described above, the D-shaped cross-section portion of the shaft body 542 is in contact with the opening end 534a of the retaining ring 534 and plays the role of suppressing the relative rotation of the retaining ring 534 with respect to the shaft body 542. By engaging with the flat surface 542a in 542b, it also has a role for taking charge of rotational torque. Thereby, while improving the durability of the shaft body 542 and the wheel gear 533, the base portion 533c of the wheel gear 533 is extended in the axial direction, and compared with the case where the engagement area with the flat surface 542a is ensured. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size and weight.

  Here, as described above, the retaining ring 534 is formed such that the projecting tips of the three projecting portions 534c can press the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542. Therefore, when the retaining ring 534 is fitted into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 542, the retaining ring 534 can be rotated together with the shaft body 542 (that is, rotated from the shaft body 542 to the protrusion 533e via the retaining ring 534). Torque can be transmitted).

  Thus, the rotational torque transmitted between the wheel gear 533 and the shaft body 542 is not handled only between the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542, but the wheel It can also be handled between the protrusion 533e of the gear 533 and the open end 534a of the retaining ring 534. As a result, the rotational torque can be dispersed, and the durability of the shaft body 542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved accordingly.

  In order to increase the engagement area on the flat surfaces 533a and 542a and improve the durability, as described above, the wheel gear 533 (base portion 533c) is increased in size and weight, As in the present embodiment, the wheel ring 534 (the base portion 533c) is made smaller and lighter by making the retaining ring 534, which plays the role of retaining the shaft body 542, also serving as the rotational torque. Can be achieved.

  Here, the mechanism for rotating the first rotating decorative body 540 (first decorative portion 543) is large because the first decorative portion 543 is formed in a relatively large size and has a large weight so as to obtain a function as a decorative body. Durability that receives rotational torque is required. On the other hand, since the first arm 500 is disposed at the tip position when the first arm 500 is displaced about the arm shaft 520, the mechanism is lightweight in order to suppress the inertial force when the first arm 500 is displaced. Is required.

  On the other hand, according to the rotation mechanism 530 in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotational torque can be received using the flat surface 533e1 of the protrusion 533e and the retaining ring 534, so that durability is ensured. However, the inertia force can be reduced by weight reduction, and the first arm 500 can be displaced smoothly.

  Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. The second arm 600 has one end pivotally supported by the extending portion 552 (see FIG. 11) of the second rotating decorative body 550 and the other end connected to the second base body 430 and the second cover body 440 so as to be displaceable. Is done. That is, with the displacement of the first arm 500 around the arm shaft 520, the shaft support portion on one end side is relatively rotated, and the other end side can be displaced along the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430. The Here, the second arm 600 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 17A is a front perspective view of the second arm 600, and FIG. 17B is a rear perspective view of the second arm 600. As shown in FIG. 17, the second arm 600 includes a main body member 610 formed in a long shape from a resin material, a fixed decorative body 620 fixed to one end of the main body member 610, and the other end of the main body portion 610. And a guide body 630 which is a cylindrical body having a circular cross-section and projecting toward the back surface.

  The main body member 610 is formed in a flat plate shape and is disposed on the front side of the main body member 610. The main body member 610 is continuous along the outer edge of the flat plate portion and has a rectangular rib-shaped wall standing from the flat plate portion. And a flat plate body fastened and fixed to the upright end side of the wall portion of the base body, and formed into a hollow box shape having a rectangular cross section having an internal space.

  Thereby, while ensuring the section modulus of the main body member 610 and making it difficult to bend and deform, the weight of the main body member 610 is reduced, and the load on the drive motor 900 when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced is reduced. it can. Further, since the main body member 610 has a hollow box shape, the electrical connection line of the fixed decorative body 620 can be routed (wired) using the internal space. Thereby, damage to the electrical wiring can be suppressed.

  The fixed decorative body 620 is a member that is disposed on the distal end side (one end side) of the second arm 600 (main body member 610), and has a connecting pin 621 that is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section protruding from the back surface thereof. Prepare. The connection pin 621 is pivotally supported via the collar C1 in the pivotal support hole 552a opened at the extension tip of the extension part 552 of the second rotary decorative body 550, so that one end of the second arm 600 is the first. The arm 500 (second rotating decorative body 550) is connected to be rotatable relative to the arm 500 (second rotating decorative body 550).

  In the present embodiment, the fixed decorative body 620 is formed as a form in which star shapes are concentrically overlapped. In addition, the fixed decorative body 620 is partially formed of a light-transmitting material on the front side, and light emission of an LED (not shown) disposed therein can be visually recognized.

  A pair of guide bodies 630 are disposed at a predetermined interval. The guide body 630 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430 via the collar C2, so that the other end of the second arm 600 is slidable along the guide groove 431. Thus, the second base body 430 is connected (see FIGS. 6 to 9).

  In the first position where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are projected from the front surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIGS. 5 to 7), the fixed arm 620 side of the pair of collars C2 is disposed. The positioned collar C2 is brought into contact with the upper end (upper side in FIG. 7) of the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430 and further movement is restricted, while the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are in the third pattern. In the second position retracted to the side of the display device 81 (the back of the game board 13) (see FIGS. 2, 8, and 9), it is located on the opposite side of the fixed decorative body 620 of the pair of collars C2. The collar C2 is brought into contact with the lower end (lower side in FIG. 9) of the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430, and further movement is restricted.

  Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. The gear member 700, the reduction gear 800, and the drive motor 900 are respectively supported by the first base body 410, and the gear member 700 is connected to the first arm 500 via the projecting pin 730. Here, the gear member 700, the reduction gear 800, and the drive motor 900 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  18 is a front perspective view of the gear member 700, the reduction gear 800, and the drive motor 900 attached to the first base body 410, and FIG. 19 is a gear member in a state where the first arm 500 is connected. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, a pinion gear 920 is fixed to the drive shaft 910 of the drive motor 900, and one of the reduction gears 800 of the two reduction gears 800 meshed with the pinion gear 920 is attached to the pinion gear 920. 800 is meshed. The gear member 700 is engaged with the other reduction gear 800 of the two reduction gears 800.

  Therefore, when the drive shaft 910 of the drive motor 900 is rotationally driven, the rotational drive force of the drive shaft 910 is transmitted to the gear member 700 via the pinion gear 920 and the reduction gear 800, and the gear member 700 is rotated. .

  The first base body 410 is provided with a rotational position detection sensor S on the side of the gear member 700. The rotational position detection sensor S is an optical sensor including a light emitting portion Sa and a light receiving portion Sb, and the detected portion 720 (flat plate portion 723) of the gear member 700 moves in a space between the light emitting portion Sa and the light receiving portion Sb. By disposing on the locus, the rotational position of the gear member 700 is detected based on the presence or absence of the detected portion 720 (flat plate portion 723).

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first arm 500 (connection-side main body 511) is connected to the gear member 700 via a projecting pin 730 inserted through the guide groove 511 a. Therefore, when the gear member 700 is rotated, the first arm 500 causes the connection-side main body 511 to follow the movement locus of the projecting pin 730 while moving the projecting pin 730 along the guide groove 511a. The arm shaft 520 is displaced about the center (see FIGS. 6 to 9).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the detailed structure of the gear member 700 is demonstrated. 20 (a) is a front view of the gear member 700, FIG. 20 (b) is a side view of the gear member 700 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXb in FIG. 20 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the gear member 700 in the XXc-XXc line | wire of Fig.20 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 20, the gear member 700 is disposed on the first base body 410 so as to be rotatable about a gear shaft 790 (see FIG. 18) and has teeth that can mesh with the reduction gear 800 on the outer peripheral surface. A gear body 710 to be engraved, a detected portion 720 projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body 710, and a protrusion protruding upward from the detected portion 720 in parallel with the gear shaft 790 The gear body 710, the detected portion 720, and the projecting pin 730 are integrally formed from a resin material.

  The gear main body 710 is formed in a disc shape, and a gear shaft 790 is fixed to a shaft hole penetratingly formed in the center. The teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface are formed in a range of a central angle of 330 degrees around the shaft hole. On the upper surface of the gear main body 710, four ribs extending in a radial line shape with the shaft hole as a center are erected to increase the overall rigidity.

  The detected part 720 is a part detected by the rotational position detection sensor S, and an overhanging base part 721 that protrudes radially outward from a region where the teeth are not engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear body 710, A pin receiving portion 722 connected to the protruding tip of the protruding base portion 721 and a flat plate portion 723 protruding outward in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface on the bottom surface side of the pin receiving portion 722 are provided.

  The overhang base 721 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above, and the thickness dimension thereof (the vertical dimension in FIGS. 20B and 20C) is the same as the tooth thickness dimension of the gear body 710. . The pin receiving portion 722 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is arranged in a posture in which the axial center of the cylinder is parallel to the gear shaft 790. As for the bottom face side of the pin receiving part 722, the side to which the overhang | projection base part 721 is connected is notched partially. The flat plate portion 723 is formed into a fan-shaped flat plate shape that becomes wider as it goes outward in the radial direction, and the thickness dimension thereof is smaller than the tooth thickness dimension of the gear body 710. Further, the bottom surface of the flat plate portion 723 is flush with the bottom surface of the pin receiving portion 722.

  The bottom surfaces of the pin receiving portion 722 and the flat plate portion 723 (the surface on the side facing the first base body 410, the lower surface of FIGS. 20B and 20C), the outer peripheral surface of the pin receiving portion 722, and the flat plate portion. A ridge line portion (that is, an edge portion of the bottom surface of the pin receiving portion 722 and the flat plate portion 723) intersecting with the side surface of 723 (FIG. 20B, the front side and the back side of the paper surface) is formed to be curved in a circular arc shape in cross section. The Therefore, as will be described later, when the bottom surface of the flat plate portion 723 comes into contact with the regulating rib 413 (see FIG. 21) due to the inclination of the gear member 700 (falling of the detected portion 720), the flat plate portion It is possible to suppress the edge of the bottom surface of 723 from being caught by the regulation rib 413. Therefore, the gear member 700 can be rotated smoothly.

  The projecting pin 730 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is disposed at a position eccentric from the gear shaft 790. In the present embodiment, the protruding pin 730 protrudes from the upper surface of the pin receiving portion 722 of the detected portion 720. The protruding pin 730 is formed at a position where the cylindrical axis is concentric with the pin receiving portion 722. Therefore, the projecting pin 730 is arranged in a posture parallel to the gear shaft 790.

  With reference to FIG. 21, a structure for attaching gear body 700 to first base body 410 will be described. FIG. 21A is a front view of the first base body 410, and FIG. 21B is a cross-sectional view of the first base body 410 taken along line XXIb-XXIb in FIG. FIG. 21 shows a state where only the gear member 700 and the rotational position detection sensor S are attached.

  As shown in FIG. 21, a bearing D is disposed on the first base body 410, and a gear shaft 790 is rotatably supported on the bearing D, so that the gear member 700 is attached to the first base body 410. Arranged on the upper surface side. The gear shaft 790 is provided with a retaining ring (not shown) in a circumferential groove recessed at the tip (the lower end in FIG. 21 (b)), whereby the bearing D, the gear member 700, and the gear shaft are mounted. 790 is held by the first base body 410.

  A support rib 411 is erected on the upper surface of the first base body 410, and the erected tip of the support rib 411 supports the bottom surface of the gear body 710 of the gear member 700. The support rib 411 extends along a virtual circle centered on the gear shaft 790 and is formed as a protrusion having a semispherical cross section, so that the gear member 700 can be supported with a small rotational resistance.

  The first base body 410 is provided with a recessed portion 412 extending along the movement locus of the pin receiving portion 720 and the flat plate portion 730 of the gear member 700. A regulating rib 413 is erected on the upper surface of the recessed portion 412, and a displacement of a predetermined amount or more of the detected portion 720 (displacement in a direction in which the detected portion 720 approaches the first base body 410, FIG. ) Regulate downward displacement).

  The restriction rib 413 extends along a virtual circle centered on the gear shaft 790 (see FIG. 21A) and is formed as a hemispherical cross section (see FIG. 21B). Specifically, the restriction rib 413 is located on an imaginary straight line connecting the axis of the gear shaft 790 and the axis of the projecting pin 730 (pin receiving portion 722) and is on the side connected to the flat plate portion 723. It extends along the movement trajectory of the bottom surface of pin receiving portion 722 (hereinafter referred to as “restricted portion P1”).

  In the first base body 410, the support rib 411 is in contact with the bottom surface of the gear body 710 of the gear member 700 to support the gear member 700 in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 21 (b)). The rib 413 is formed so as to have a gap between the bottom surface of the detected portion 720 of the gear member 700.

  Here, when the gear member 700 is rotationally driven and the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a of the first arm 500 (see FIG. 19), the projecting structure that presses the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a. The gear member 700 is inclined by the reaction force acting on the pin 730. In particular, the detected portion 720 formed to project outward in the radial direction is tilted (bending deformation in a direction approaching the upper surface of the first base body 410).

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, since the restriction rib 413 is erected along the movement locus of the detected portion 720 on the first base body 410, the gear member 700 is inclined (the detected portion 420 is In the case of falling), the detected portion 720 can be received by the restriction rib 413. Thereby, while suppressing an increase in the rotational resistance of the gear member 700, an excessive inclination of the gear member 700 can be avoided, and not only the detected portion 720 but also the gear shaft 790 and the tooth surface can be prevented from being damaged. Moreover, since it can suppress rotating with the tooth surface of the gear member 700 and the tooth surface of the reduction gear 800 shifted (center misalignment state), the rotational resistance of the gear member 700 becomes excessive and the tooth It is possible to suppress the surface from being worn.

  Moreover, the excessive inclination of the gear member 700 can be effectively suppressed by adopting the configuration in which the detection rib 413 receives the detected portion 720 having the maximum displacement when the gear member 700 is inclined. Further, in this way, the portion for exhibiting the function as the detected portion by the rotational position detection sensor S is also used as the portion for exhibiting the stopper function for suppressing the inclination of the gear member 700. The structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the parts for exhibiting both functions are divided into two parts.

  As described above, a gap is formed between the standing tip of the regulation rib 413 and the bottom surface of the detected portion 720 of the gear member 700. Therefore, when the gear member 700 is rotationally driven and the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a of the first arm 500, the reaction force to the projecting pin 730 that presses the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a. When the action is small, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of contact resistance by maintaining a gap between the bottom surface of the detected portion 720 and the standing tip of the regulating rib 413. Thereby, the drive force of the drive motor 900 required for rotation of the gear member 700 can be reduced.

  Here, the projecting pin 730 may be erected from the gear body 710 in the gear member 700. In the present embodiment, the projecting pin 730 is erected from the detected portion 720. When 700 is rotated and the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a, when the projecting pin 730 receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a, only the detected portion 720 is partially Therefore, the inclination of the gear body 710 (gear shaft 790) can be easily suppressed. That is, the deformation can be concentrated on the detected portion 720 and the deformation of the gear body 710 can be suppressed. Accordingly, the tooth surface of the gear main body 710 and the tooth surface of the reduction gear 800 are rotated in a shifted state, and it is possible to suppress excessive rotation resistance and wear of the tooth surface.

  On the other hand, the protruding pin 730 is positioned on the radially inner side (left side in FIG. 21B) than the regulating rib 413. That is, the regulating rib 413 (the regulated portion P1) is located radially outward (right side in FIG. 21B) from the base portion of the projecting pin 730 when viewed in the axial direction of the gear shaft 790 of the gear member 700.

  Therefore, when the projecting pin 730 receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a, the regulated portion P1 of the detected portion 720 (that is, the portion closest to the first case portion 410, and A portion that is formed in a cylindrical shape and has rigidity secured when received by the restriction rib 413 can be received by the restriction rib 413. Thereby, the inclination of the gear member 700 can be suppressed effectively.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21A, the restriction rib 413 is detected by the rotational position detection sensor S in a region beyond the rotational position detection sensor S (that is, the detected portion 720 (flat plate portion 723) of the gear member 700). Therefore, when the gear member 700 is rotated while the projecting pin 730 receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a, the flat plate portion 723 of the detected portion 720 detects the rotational position. It can suppress colliding with sensor S (light-receiving part Sb). Thereby, the reliability of the rotation position detection of the gear member 700 can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. When the gear member 700 is rotated forward (rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 7) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 900 from the state shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 (first position), the projecting pin 730 is guided to the guide groove. 511a is pressed, the first arm 500 is displaced about the gear shaft 520 (rotated counterclockwise about the gear shaft 520 in FIG. 7), and along with the displacement of the first arm 500, The second arm 600 slides the other end (guide body 630, see FIG. 17B) downward (downward in FIG. 7) along the guide groove 431, so that the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are moved. Is disposed at the second position shown in FIGS.

  On the other hand, when the gear member 700 is reversely rotated (rotated clockwise in FIG. 9) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 900 from the state shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 (second position), the projecting pin 730 guides. The inner wall surface of the groove 511a is pressed, and the first arm 500 is displaced about the gear shaft 520 (rotates clockwise about the gear shaft 520 in FIG. 7), and with the displacement of the first arm 500, The second arm 600 slides the other end (guide body 630, see FIG. 17B) upward along the guide groove 431 (upward in FIG. 9), so that the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are moved. Is disposed at the first position shown in FIGS.

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, the second rotating decorative body 550 rotatably disposed on the first arm 500 has one end of the second arm 600 on the extending portion 552 of the second rotating decorative body 550. Is supported (see FIG. 17B), and the other end of the second arm 600 is slidably coupled along the guide groove 431 of the second base body 430.

  Therefore, when the first arm 500 is displaced with respect to the case member 400, an angle formed by the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 (that is, one end of the second arm 600 is placed on the second rotating decorative body 540). A straight line connecting the connection position (the shaft support position by the shaft support hole 552a and the connection pin 621, see FIGS. 11 and 17) and the arm shaft 520, and the connection position (by the shaft support hole 552a and the connection pin 621). Change in angle between a shaft support position) and a straight line connecting the other end of the second arm 600 (the guide body 630, see FIG. 17) to the connection position where the second case body 630 (guide shaft 631) is connected. Accordingly, the second rotating decorative body 550 can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the first arm 500.

  As a result, the drive motor 900 that applies a driving force to the first arm 500 not only serves as a drive source for the first arm 500 to be displaced about the arm shaft 520, but also the second rotating decorative body 550 has the first rotation. It can also serve as a drive source for moving (rotating) relative to one arm 500. Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor only for rotating the second rotating decorative body 550.

  In this case, the first arm 500 is provided with a first rotation decoration body 540 coaxially with the second rotation decoration body 550, and the first rotation decoration body 540 can be rotated independently by the rotation mechanism 530. It is formed. Therefore, the first decorative body 540 and the first decorative portion 543 and the second decorative portion 553 of the second rotational decorative pair 550 are independently rotated on the same axis, and the first arm 500 is displaced. The game area can be moved linearly or curvedly, and as a result, the effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the first rotation decoration body 540 (first decoration part 543) and the second rotation decoration pair 550 (second decoration part 553) are set in the same rotation direction and have different rotations. Set to speed. Thereby, with the displacement of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600, the first rotating decorative body 540 (first decorative portion 543) and the second rotating decorative pair 550 (second decorative portion 553) are simultaneously rotated. In this case, the player can be given an impression that both of them rotate smoothly, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

  Here, the relative displacement (rotation) between the second rotating decorative body 550 and the first arm 500 may be configured such that the other end of the second arm 600 is rotatably supported by the second base body 430. Can be achieved. In this case, the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the other end of the second arm 600 is slidably coupled to the second base body 430 via the guide groove 431 of the second base pair 430. Thereby, the displaceable amount of the first arm 500 can be increased as compared with the case where the other end of the second arm 600 is rotatably supported by the second base body 430. If the displaceable amount of the first arm 500 increases, the rotatable amount of the second rotating decorative body 550 (second decorative portion 553) can also be increased. As a result, not only the effect by the displacement of the first arm 500 itself but also the effect by the rotation of the second decorative portion 553 in accordance with the displacement can be further enhanced.

  In the first position shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 have the collar C2 located on the fixed decorative body 620 side of the pair of collars C2 as described above. The second base body 430 is in contact with the upper end (upper side in FIG. 7) of the guide groove 431, and further movement is restricted. In this case, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 further include a part of the outer surface of the swing-side main body 512 of the first arm 500 that is curved in an arc shape (hereinafter referred to as “first position arm restricted portion P2”). Is further abutted against a notch end surface of the outer wall of the first base body 410 (hereinafter referred to as “first position base restricted portion P3”), and further movement is restricted.

  Further, in the second position shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 have the collar C2 located on the opposite side of the fixed decorative body 620 in the pair of collars C2, as described above. The second base body 430 is in contact with the lower end (lower side in FIG. 9) of the guide groove 431, and further movement is restricted. In this case, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are further part of the outer peripheral surface of the housing 513 of the first arm 500 (hereinafter referred to as “second position arm restricted portion P4”, FIG. 10B). 11 (b)) is in contact with the inner corner of the outer wall of the second base body 430 (hereinafter referred to as “second position base restricted portion P5”; see FIGS. 6 and 7), A part of the body member 610 of the second arm 600 (hereinafter referred to as “second position arm restricted portion P6”) is connected to the inner surface of the outer wall of the second base body 430 (hereinafter referred to as “second position base restricted portion P7”). Further movement is also restricted.

  Here, a holding structure for the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 disposed in the first position and the second position will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 25.

  FIG. 22A is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 arranged at the first position, and FIG. 22B is a first view of the XXIIb portion in FIG. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of one arm 500 and a gear member 700. FIG. 23A is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 in a state where the gear member 700 is reversely rotated from the state shown in FIG. 22A, and FIG. FIG. 24 is a partially enlarged front view of the first arm 500 and the gear member 700 in the XXIIIb portion of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the first position from the predetermined position (that is, the gear member 700 rotates in the reverse direction (FIG. 22 (b) clockwise)). 22), a straight line L1 connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the arm shaft 520 and a straight line L2 connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790 The angle θ formed becomes large.

  Therefore, when an external force acts on the first arm 500 and the external force is transmitted from the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a to the projecting pin 730 (gear member 700), the first arm 500 is close to the first position. As the state increases, the force component in the direction of rotating the gear member 700 out of the force generated in the gear member 700 (that is, the force in the direction orthogonal to the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790). Component) can be reduced. As a result, when the first arm 500 is held in the first position, the driving force required for the driving motor 900 to counter an external force (for example, gravity) acting on the first arm 500 can be reduced. Accordingly, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and the energy consumption can be reduced.

  Here, when starting the displacement of the first arm 500 in a stopped state, the load of the drive motor 900 increases due to the influence of inertial force and static frictional force.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first arm 500 is stopped (that is, the first position shown in FIG. 22), the straight line L1 connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the arm shaft 520 is Since the angle θ formed by the axis L of the projecting pin 730 and the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the gear shaft 790 is large (that is, the reduction ratio is large), the displacement of the first arm 500 from the first position is reduced. When starting (that is, when the gear member 700 is rotated forward from the state shown in FIG. 22 (counterclockwise in FIG. 22B)), the load on the drive motor 900 can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, since the reduction ratio can be increased as described above, when the first arm 500 reaches the first position, the displacement speed of the first arm 500 can be set even if the rotation speed of the gear member 700 is constant. It can be decelerated. Therefore, an impact at the time of reaching the first position (particularly caused by a collision between the first position arm restricted portion P2 and the first position base restricted portion P3 and a collision with the upper end of the guide groove 431 of the collar C2). Durability) and the durability can be improved.

  The “predetermined position” when “the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the first position from the predetermined position” described above is a straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790. It means a state where the axis of the gear shaft 790 is positioned on L2 (that is, a state where the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 overlap).

  As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, the gear member 700 rotates in the reverse direction in the guide groove 511a in a state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are disposed at the first position (FIG. 22B). An area for further movement of the projecting pin 730 is formed by rotating clockwise and rotating in the first direction.

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 22 (the state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are disposed at the first position), the gear member 700 is reversely rotated (rotated in the first direction) as shown in FIG. As the projecting pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a, the first position arm restricted portion P2 is moved to the first position base restricted portion P3, and the collar C2 is moved to the upper end of the guide groove 431, respectively. And the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, the gap between the projecting pin 730 and the guide groove 511a, and the like can be absorbed. That is, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be pressed in the direction from the second position toward the first position (the left direction in FIG. 23A). Thereby, the 1st arm 500 and the 2nd arm 600 can be held firmly in the 1st position, suppressing backlash.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the present embodiment, after the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position shown in FIG. 22, the gear member 700 includes the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the arm shaft. The straight line L1 connecting the shaft centers of 520 and the straight line L2 connecting the shaft center of the projecting pin 730 and the shaft center of the gear shaft 790 is rotated to a position where they are orthogonal (that is, angle θ = 90 degrees).

  Therefore, even if an external force is applied to the first arm 500, the force component in the direction in which the gear member 700 is rotated (that is, in the direction orthogonal to the straight line L2 connecting the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the axis of the gear shaft 790). Force component) is not generated, and the rotation of the gear member 700 can be restricted. As a result, since the first arm 500 can be mechanically maintained at the first position, the driving force of the driving motor 900 can be reduced (or released). As a result, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and energy consumption can be reduced.

  FIG. 24A is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 arranged at the second position, and FIG. 24B is the first view in the XXIVb portion of FIG. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of one arm 500 and a gear member 700. FIG. 25A is a front view of the first arm 500, the second arm 600, and the gear member 700 in a state where the gear member 700 is rotated forward from the state shown in FIG. 24A. FIG. 26 is a partially enlarged front view of the first arm 500 and the gear member 700 in the XXVb portion of FIG.

  According to this embodiment, even in the second position shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the same operational effects as in the case of the first position shown in FIGS.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 24, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the second position from the predetermined position (that is, the gear member 700 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 24B)). The angle θ formed by the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 increases.

  Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the first arm 500, the force component in the direction in which the gear member 700 is rotated (the force component in the direction orthogonal to the straight line 2) is smaller as the first arm 500 is closer to the second position. it can. As a result, the driving force required to hold the first arm 500 in the second position can be reduced, and accordingly, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and the energy consumption can be reduced.

  Further, in the second position shown in FIG. 24, as in the case of the first position, the angle θ formed by the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 is large (that is, the reduction ratio is large). The load required for starting the displacement of the arm 500 (that is, when the gear member 700 is rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise in FIG. 22B) from the state shown in FIG. 24) is reduced. The capacity of 900 can be reduced. Further, by increasing the reduction ratio, an impact when reaching the second position (particularly, the collision between the second position arm restricted portions P4 and P6 and the second position base restricted portions P5 and P7, and Durability can be improved by suppressing (impact generated by collision with the lower end of the guide groove 431 of the collar C2).

  The “predetermined position” when “the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 approach the second position from the predetermined position” described above is the same as the case described above, and the axis of the projecting pin 730 and the gear shaft. This means a state where the shaft center of the gear shaft 790 is positioned on the straight line L2 connecting the shaft centers of 790 (that is, a state where the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 overlap).

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the present embodiment, the gear member 700 is rotated forward in the guide groove 511a in a state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the second position (FIG. 24B). A region for further movement of the projecting pin 730 is formed by rotating counterclockwise and rotating in the second direction.

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 24 (the state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are disposed at the second position), the gear member 700 is rotated forward (rotated in the second direction) as shown in FIG. When the protruding pin 730 is moved along the guide groove 511a, the second position arm restricted portions P4 and P6 are moved to the second position base restricted portions P5 and P7, respectively, and the collar C2 is the lower end of the guide groove 431. The gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, the gap between the projecting pin 730 and the guide groove 511a, and the like can be absorbed. That is, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be pressed in the direction from the first position to the second position (right direction in FIG. 25A). Thereby, the 1st arm 500 and the 2nd arm 600 can be held firmly in the 2nd position, suppressing backlash.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the present embodiment, after the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are disposed at the second position shown in FIG. 24, the gear member 700 has a straight line L1 and a straight line L2 orthogonal to each other (that is, , Angle θ = 90 degrees). Therefore, even when an external force acts on the first arm 500, a force component in the direction in which the gear member 700 is rotated (a force component in a direction orthogonal to the straight line L2) is not generated, and the rotation of the gear member 700 can be restricted. it can. As a result, since the first arm 500 can be mechanically maintained at the second position, the driving force of the driving motor 900 can be reduced (or released). As a result, the capacity of the drive motor 900 can be reduced and energy consumption can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, since the guide groove 511a is linearly extended, the gear member 700 is further reversely rotated after the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the first position shown in FIG. (Rotated in the first direction) and the projecting pin 730 can be gradually pressed against the inner wall surface of the guide groove 511a when the state shown in FIG. That is, the operation of pressing the first position arm restricted portion P2 to the first position base restricted portion P3 and the collar C2 to the upper end of the guide groove 431, the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, The operation of absorbing the gap between the pin 730 and the guide groove 511a can be gradually advanced. Thereby, damage of each part can be controlled. The same applies when the gear member 700 is further rotated forward (rotated in the second direction) after being placed in the second position shown in FIG. The operation of pressing the portions P4 and P6 to the second position base restricted portions P5 and P7 and the collar C2 to the lower end of the guide groove 431, the gap between the arm shaft 520 and its bearing, the protruding pin 730 and the guide The operation | movement which absorbs the clearance gap between the grooves 511a can be advanced gradually, and the failure | damage of each part can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 6 to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, in a state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are disposed at the first position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 have the first rotating decorative body 540 and the second rotation. The decorative body 550 and the fixed decorative body 620 are positioned outward (left side in FIG. 7) from the edge 433 of the second base body 430. As shown in FIG. 8, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are In the state where the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are arranged at the second position, the first rotating decorative body 540, the second rotating decorative body 550, and the fixed decorative body 620 are stored in the storage surface portion of the second base body 430. 432.

  Therefore, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 pass through the edge portion 433 of the second base body 430. . In this case, each of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 is formed in an elongated shape, and a heavy object (first object) is located at a position farthest from the fulcrum (arm shaft 520 and guide body 630) of the elongated body. A rotating decorative body 540, a rotating mechanism 530, and the like are provided. Therefore, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are likely to swing in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board 13). May collide with the edge portion 433 and cause damage, or may be locked by the edge portion 433 of the second base body 430 and cannot be displaced.

  It is conceivable that the edge 433 of the second base body 430 is not positioned on the displacement locus of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600. However, expanding the second base body 430 to the entire displacement region of the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 (that is, extending the position of the edge 433 to the left in FIGS. 7 and 9) Since the display area of the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is hidden by the second base body 430 (the flat storage surface portion 432), it cannot be performed, and the edge portion 433 of the second base body 430 is used as the first arm 500. And retreating out of the displacement locus of the second arm 600 (that is, retreating the position of the edge 433 to the right in FIGS. 7 and 9) is the back side of the second base body 430 (housing surface portion 432). Wiring and a board | substrate arrange | positioned in this are exposed, and since an external appearance is impaired, it cannot carry out. Here, the detailed configuration of the second base body 430 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 26A is a front view of the second base body 430, and FIG. 26B is a cross-sectional view of the second base body 430 along the line XXVIb-XXVIb of FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position, the second base body 430 is at least the first rotation decoration body 540 and the second rotation decoration body. 55 and an edge portion 433 formed along the outer edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). 433 is formed to be curved in a circular arc cross section.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, the edge portion 433 has a thickness dimension (dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 26B) larger than that of the receiving surface portion 432, and the entire area in the thickness direction is curved in a cross-section arc shape. Formed.

  Thus, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced from the first position to the second position while securing an opening for exposing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the game area (game board 13). In addition, even if the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 swaying in the front-rear direction collide with the edge 433 of the second base body 430, the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are accommodated by the arc-shaped curve of the cross section. The impact can be buffered by guiding toward the surface portion 432 side. Therefore, damage can be suppressed, and the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 can be prevented from being locked and stopped by the edge portion 433 of the second base body 430 and smoothly displaced.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the edge 433 is formed in a corrugated shape in which the outer edge (the left end in FIG. 26 (a)) is combined with a plurality of arc shapes in front view. The front surface (the front side surface in FIG. 26A) is also formed into a corrugated shape in which a plurality of arc shapes are combined. As described above, the decorative shape is applied to the outer edge and the surface of the edge portion 433 so that the edge portion 433 is formed to be curved in a circular arc shape with a relatively large diameter as in the present embodiment. Even if it exists, it can be made to recognize a player without a sense of incongruity as an integrated design with the curve of a circular arc shape and a decoration shape, and it can suppress that the edge part 433 stands out unnaturally.

  Further, the second base body 430 is formed of a light transmissive material, and the storage surface portion 432 in which the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced on the front surface side is formed as a flat surface on the front surface thereof. A decorative shape that is similar to and continuous with the edge portion 433 is formed on the back surface (see FIG. 27).

  As a result, when the first arm 500 and the second arm 600 are displaced on the front surface side (flat surface side) of the storage surface portion 432, the displacement of the first arm 500 and the like is prevented from being hindered and smoothly performed. Can be displaced. On the other hand, the storage surface portion 432 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the decoration shape is formed on the back surface thereof, so that the player feels uncomfortable with the edge portion 433 and the decoration shape on the back surface of the storage surface portion 432 as an integrated design. The above-described effect of recognizing the image can be ensured.

  Further, when the front surface of the storage surface portion 432 is formed as a flat surface, the flat surface (front surface) is apt to be scratched by sliding the first arm 500 and the second arm 600, and the back surface. Since the decorative shape is formed on the front surface, the front scratch and the rear decorative shape can be overlapped to make the front scratch inconspicuous.

  Next, the structure of the case member 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. 27 is an exploded rear perspective view of the case member 400.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the case member 400 includes a first base body 410 on which a first arm 500, a gear member 700, a reduction gear 800, and a drive motor 900 are disposed (see FIGS. 7 and 9), The first base body 410 is detachably connected to the second base body 430, and the receiving surface portion 432 and the edge portion 433 of the second base body 430 are decorated. Thereby, diversion of the case member 400 to other models can be performed efficiently.

  That is, the position of the arm shaft 520 of the first arm 500 is changed or the number of teeth of the reduction gear 800 or the pinion gear 920 is changed in accordance with the change of the displacement form (for example, displacement angle or displacement speed) of the first arm 500. If it is necessary to change the position of the arrangement in order to increase or decrease the (reduction ratio), if the decorative shape of the accommodation surface portion 432 or the edge portion 433 does not need to be changed, the entire case member 400 It is useless to change. Similarly, when it is necessary to change the decorative shape of the accommodation surface portion 432 or the edge portion 433, it is necessary to change the arrangement position of the arm shaft 520 of the first arm 500, the arrangement position of the reduction gear 800, or the like. If there is no, it is useless to change the entire case member 400.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the case member 400 includes the first base body 410 on which members related to driving such as the first arm 500 and the driving motor 900 are disposed, the housing surface portion 432, the edge portion 433, and the like. Since it is divided into two members, the second base body 430 on which the part related to the decoration is disposed, only one of the first base body 410 or the second base body 430 is changed according to the change contents, and the first base is changed. Since the other of the body 410 or the second base body 430 can be used as it is, the case member 400 can be efficiently used for other models.

  Here, since the other end of the second arm 600 is displaceably disposed on the second base body 430, the other end of the second arm 600 is displaceably disposed on the first base body 410. As compared with the above, the distance between the arm shaft 520 of the first arm 500 and the other end (guide body 630) of the second arm 600 can be increased (separated). Thereby, the displaceable amount of the 1st arm 500 can be enlarged, and the production effect by displacing the 1st arm 500 can be heightened.

  Note that the relationship between the second arm 600 and the case member 400 (second base body 430) is sufficient if the other end of the second arm 600 is connected to be displaceable. Therefore, the first arm 500 or the first arm 500 is sufficient. Even when the means for driving the motor (such as the drive motor 900, the reduction gear 800, or the gear member 700) is changed, or when the second arm 600 is changed in addition to this, the second base body 430 is used. Can be used as it is. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the other end of the second arm 600 is connected to the second base body 430 instead of the first base body 410 in this way, the case member 400 can be effectively diverted to other models. Both the increase in the displacement amount of the first arm 500 can be achieved.

  Next, the details of the connection structure between the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, the first base body 410 has a back surface as a region where the second base body 430 and the back plate member 450 are connected as a flat surface, and the flat surface includes a seating surface wall 415 and A pair of first protrusions 416 and a pair of second protrusions 417 protrude.

  The seating surface wall 415 is a part for forming the seating surface of the back plate member 450, and extends linearly in the vertical and horizontal directions as a protrusion having a rectangular cross section. The inner wall surface of the portion extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 27) of the seat surface wall 415 functions as a portion for positioning the second base body 430. That is, the distance from the inner wall surface of the portion extending in the vertical direction of the seating surface wall 415 to the first projection 416 is equal to the distance from one side surface (left side surface in FIG. 27) of the protruding plate portion 434 to the positioning hole 434a. It is said. Therefore, by making the side surface of the protruding plate portion 434 contact the inner wall surface of the seat surface wall 415, both can be positioned in the lateral direction.

  The seat surface wall 415 has the same height as the projecting tip surface of the first projection 416 and the second projection 417 (see the seat projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c, see FIG. 28). It is set (that is, the protruding front end surfaces of the respective portions 415 to 417 are arranged flush), and the front surface of the back plate member 450 is seated on the protruding front end surfaces of the respective portions 415 to 417.

  The first protrusion 416 is a portion for positioning the second base body 430 (projecting plate portion 434) with respect to the first base body 410 and forming a seating surface of the back plate member 450, and has a circular cross section. A female screw that can be fastened with a fastening screw (not shown) is recessed in the protruding front end surface of the cylindrical body. The second base body 430 is positioned with respect to the first base body 410 by inserting the pair of first protrusions 416 through the positioning holes 434 a of the protruding plate portion 434. In this case, the thickness dimension of the protruding plate portion 434 is set to a dimension that is the same as or slightly smaller than the protruding height dimension of the first protrusion 416, so that the rear plate member is also formed on the protruding front end surface of the first protrusion 416. The front of 450 is seated.

  The second protrusion 417 is a part for positioning the back plate member 450 with respect to the first base body 410 and forming a seating surface of the back plate member 450, and a pair of the second protrusions 417 is disposed. Here, the second protrusion 417 will be described with reference to FIG.

  28 (a) is a partially enlarged rear view of the second protrusion 417, and FIG. 28 (b) is a side view of the second protrusion 417 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIIIb in FIG. 28 (a). FIG. 28C is a cross-sectional view of the second protrusion 417 taken along line XXVIIIc-XXVIIIc in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the second protrusion 417 includes a seating protrusion 417a formed in a circular column shape with a circular cross section, and a positioning protrusion 417b formed in a circular columnar shape with a smaller diameter than the seating surface protrusion 417a. And a connecting wall 417c having a rectangular cross section for connecting the outer peripheral surfaces of the seating surface protrusion 417a and the positioning protrusion 417b.

  The seat surface protrusion 417a and the connecting wall 417c are set to have the same protruding height dimension, and the protruding height dimension is set to be the same as the protruding height dimension of the seat surface wall 415 and the first protrusion 416. The That is, the front surface of the back plate member 450 is seated on the projecting front end surfaces of the seating surface projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c. Note that a female screw to which a fastening screw (not shown) can be fastened is recessed in the protruding front end surface of the seating surface protrusion 417a.

  The positioning projection 417b has a projecting height dimension larger than the projecting height dimension of the seating surface projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c, and can be inserted into the positioning hole 452 of the back plate member 450. The pair of positioning protrusions 417b (see FIG. 27) are inserted into the positioning holes 452 of the back plate member 450, whereby the back plate member 450 is positioned with respect to the first base body 410.

  The connecting wall 417c connects the bearing surface protrusion 417a and the positioning protrusion 417b in a straight line with the shortest distance. Here, while the seating surface protrusion 417a and the positioning protrusion 417b have a relatively small diameter, the protruding height is large, so that they collide with other members in the manufacturing process or the assembly process, or when transported after assembly. In addition, the seating surface protrusion 417a and the positioning protrusion 417b are connected by the connecting wall 417c, so that the rigidity of the second protrusion 417 as a whole is increased and the defect is removed. Can be suppressed.

  Further, by setting the projecting height dimension of the connection wall 417c to be the same as the projecting height dimension of the seat surface protrusion 417a, the seat surface protrusion 417a and the positioning protrusion 417b are connected to the connection wall 417c, and the second In addition to the role of increasing the strength of the protrusion 417 as a whole, it can also serve as a seating surface for seating the front surface of the back plate member 450. Therefore, the material cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the members having the respective roles are provided separately.

  Returning to FIG. On the second base body 430, a seat surface wall 425, a first protrusion 426, and a second protrusion 427 are provided projecting toward the back side below the protruding plate portion 434. The seat surface wall 425 is configured in the same manner as the seat surface wall 415 of the first base body 410 except that the arrangement position and the extension length thereof are different, and the first protrusion 426 and the second protrusion 427 are arranged in the same manner. Except for the difference in installation position, the first protrusion 416 and the second protrusion 417 of the first base body 410 are configured identically. Therefore, description of the seat surface wall 425, the first protrusion 426, and the second protrusion 427 is omitted.

  Further, the second base body 430 is provided with a protruding plate portion 434 projecting from the side surface (upper side surface in FIG. 27) connected to the first base body 410 toward the first base body 410. The protruding plate portion 434 is a portion that is overlapped and connected to the back surface of the first base body 410 and is formed in a plate shape that is rectangular in front view. A pair of positioning holes 434a, which are circular holes when viewed from the front, are formed in the protruding plate portion 434 so as to penetrate in the thickness direction, and positioning protrusions 434b are formed in a circular column shape with a circular cross section from the back surface of the protruding plate portion 434. Is projected.

  The second base body 430 is positioned with respect to the first base body 410 by inserting the first protrusions 416 of the first base body 410 into the pair of positioning holes 434 a of the protruding plate portion 434. In this case, the thickness dimension of the protruding plate part 434 is set to a dimension equivalent to the protruding height dimension of the seating surface wall 415, the first protrusion 416, etc. of the first base body 410. The front surface of the back plate member 450 is seated.

  The height of the rear surface of the projecting plate portion 434 is the same as the projecting tip surface of the seat surface wall 425, the first projection 426, and the second projection 427 (the seat surface projection 417a and the connecting wall 417c, see FIG. 28). It is set to a height position (that is, a height position where the back surface of the protruding plate portion 434 and the protruding front end surface of the seating surface wall 425 and the like are flush with each other). Therefore, the front surface of the back plate member 450 is seated on the back surface of the protruding part 434 and the protruding front end surfaces of the respective parts 425 to 427.

  The back plate member 450 is a member that is attached (fastened and fixed) to the back side of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 in order to connect the first base body 410 and the second base body 430. It is formed in a plate shape from a metal material. In addition, the back plate member 450 has a portion attached to the first base body 410 in a square shape when viewed from the front, and a portion attached to the second base body 430 is a portion attached to the first base body 410. Each is formed in a long rectangular shape having a narrower width.

  The back plate member 450 is formed by bending both sides along the direction connecting the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 (vertical direction in FIG. 27) toward the back side, and thereby the first base body 410 and the second base body. The bending rigidity with respect to the bending direction centering on the connection part with 430 (near the protruding plate part 434) is enhanced. Thereby, the connection strength of the 1st base body 410 and the 2nd base body 430 is securable.

  An insertion hole 451 and a positioning hole 452 are formed through the back plate member 450 in the plate thickness direction. The insertion hole 451 is a hole having a circular cross section with an inner diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the protruding front end surface of the first protrusions 416 and 426, through which a fastening screw (not shown) can be inserted, and corresponds to the first protrusions 416 and 426. Formed in each position. The positioning hole 452 is a circular hole having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the positioning protrusion 417b and the positioning protrusion 434b, and is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning protrusion 417b and the positioning protrusion 434b.

  Assembling of the case member 400 formed as described above first superimposes the protruding plate portion 434 of the second base body 430 on the lower portion (flat surface portion) of the back surface of the first base body 410. In this case, as described above, the protruding plate portion 434 of the second base body 430 is formed on the inner wall surface of the portion extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 27) of the seating surface wall 415 of the first base body 410. By bringing one side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 27) into contact, both can be positioned in the lateral direction. Accordingly, the first protrusion 416 can be easily inserted through the positioning hole 434a.

  Next, the back plate member 450 is placed on the back surface of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 and fastened and fixed by a fastening screw (not shown). That is, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) positioning projections 417b on the first base body 410 side and a plurality (two in this embodiment) positioning projections 417b, 434b on the second base body 430 side are positioned. Since the positions of the first protrusions 416 and 426 and the second protrusions 417 and 427 and the insertion holes 451 are matched by inserting them into the holes 452, the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 451 are inserted into the first protrusions 416. , 426 and second protrusions 417, 427, respectively. Thereby, the back plate member 450 is fastened and fixed to the back surfaces of the first base body 410 and the second base body 430, and the assembly of the case member 400 is completed.

  As described above, the case member 400 is connected to the first base body 410 and the second base body 430 by the metal back plate member 450 attached to the back side thereof. The rigidity of the case member 400 as a whole can be secured by strengthening the connection of the two base bodies 430.

  In this assembled state, the case member 400 has a plate-like shape because the protruding plate portion 434 formed on the second base body 430 is sandwiched between the back surface of the first base body 410 and the front surface of the back plate member 450. The rigidity of the case member 400 as a whole can be effectively increased while achieving simplification and downsizing of the structure by utilizing the overlapping of the bodies.

  The back plate member 450 is attached to the second base body 430 while fastening screws are fastened to the four corners of the square at a portion attached to the first base body 410 (a square portion when viewed from the front). Since the fastening screws are fastened to both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion to be formed (the elongated portion extending up and down), the case member 400 (the first member is efficiently utilized by utilizing the rigidity of the back plate member 450. The rigidity of the base body 410 and the second base body 430) can be increased.

  The case member 400 is assembled after the back plate member 450 is first attached (fastened and fixed) to the back surface of the second base body 430, and then the second base body 430 and the back plate member 450 fastened and fixed are attached to the second base body 430. 1 base body 410 may be attached (fastened and fixed).

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b). FIG. 29A is a front view of the shaft body 2542 and the retaining ring 2534 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 29B is a front view of the shaft body 2542 and the retaining ring 2534 taken along line XXIXb-XXIXb in FIG. FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the arcuate projecting tip of the projecting portion 534 c of the retaining ring 534 presses (closely contacts) the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542 c in the shaft body 542, so that the retaining ring 534 is secured to the shaft body 542. As described above, the shaft body 2542 of the second embodiment has an engaged portion 2542d that engages with the retaining ring 2534 in the circumferential direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, the shaft body 2542 is provided with an engaged portion 2542d recessed on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c. The engaged portion 2542d is a recess for receiving the overhang portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534, and the shaft body is positioned at a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a (ie, the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533). In a state where the flat surface 542a of the 542 is engaged (see FIG. 15A), it is recessed in the position opposite to the protruding portion 533e, the lower side in FIG. 29B.

  The retaining ring 2534 includes projecting portions 534c and 2534c that are formed to project radially inward from three circumferential positions on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion 534b. In the present embodiment, the overhanging portion 2534c located on the side that is 180 degrees out of phase with the opening end 534a (that is, located between the pair of overhanging portions 534c located on the opening end 534a side) The inward projecting dimension is set to be larger than the projecting dimension inward in the radial direction of the projecting portion 534c located on the opening end 534a side.

  According to the present embodiment, when the retaining ring 2534 is fitted to the appropriate position in the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 2542, the protruding portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534 is moved to the shaft body 2542 as shown in FIG. The engaged portion 2542d can be received. That is, one overhanging portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534 is engaged with the engaged portion 2542d formed as a recess in the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 2542, so that the shaft body 2542 is stopped. The wheel 2534 can be engaged in the circumferential direction.

  Thereby, since the relative movement of the retaining ring 2534 in the circumferential direction with respect to the shaft body 2542 can be restricted, the retaining ring 2534 can be reliably rotated together with the shaft body 2542. That is, since the retaining ring 2534 can be prevented from slipping in the circumferential direction with respect to the shaft body 2542, the rotational torque can be reliably transmitted from the shaft body 2542 to the protrusion 533 e via the retaining ring 2534 even with a large rotational torque. Can be transmitted.

  Thus, the rotational torque transmitted between the wheel gear 533 and the shaft body 2542 is not handled only between the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 2542, but the wheel It can also be handled between the projection 533 of the gear 533 and the open end 534a of the retaining ring 2534 (see FIG. 15B). As a result, the rotational torque can be dispersed, and the durability of the shaft body 2542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved accordingly.

  In this case, since the engaged portion 2542d of the shaft body 2542 is disposed at a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a, the shaft body 542 is inserted into the wheel gear 533, and the flat surface of the wheel gear 533 is inserted. In a state where the flat surface 542a of the shaft body 542 is engaged with 533a and 533e1 (see FIG. 15A), the engaged portion 2542d is disposed at a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the protruding portion 533e (ie, The opening of the engaged portion 2542d is desired to be opposite to the protruding portion 533e).

  Therefore, the fitting direction of the retaining ring 2534 for positioning the protrusion 533e between the opening ends 534a of the retaining ring 2534 (see FIGS. 15A and 15B), and the overhanging portion 2534c of the retaining ring 2534 Can be made to coincide with the fitting direction of the retaining ring 2534 for engaging (receiving) the engaged portion 2542d with the engaged portion 2542d of the shaft body 2542. As a result, the protruding portion 533e and the retaining ring 2534 are locked by the respective arms of the radio pliers, and only the operation of fitting the retaining ring 2534 into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 2542 is performed. The portion 2534c can be easily and reliably engaged with the engaged portion 2542d of the shaft body 2542.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 (c) and 29 (d). FIG. 29C is a front view of the shaft body 3542 and the retaining ring 3534 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 29D is a shaft body 3542 and a retaining ring 3534 taken along the line XXIXd-XXIXd in FIG. FIG.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the engaged portion 2542d is formed as a recess has been described. However, the engaged portion 3542d of the third embodiment is formed as a flat surface. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 29C and 29D, the shaft body 3542 has an engaged portion 3542d on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove 542c. The engaged portion 3542d is formed as a flat surface parallel to the flat surface 542a, and the shaft body 542 is positioned at a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a (ie, the flat surfaces 533a and 533e1 of the wheel gear 533). When the flat surface 542a is engaged (see FIG. 15A), it is formed at a position opposite to the protruding portion 533e, the lower side of FIG. 29D.

The retaining ring 3534 includes projecting portions 534c and 3534c formed by projecting radially inward from three circumferential positions on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion 534b. In the present embodiment, the overhanging portion 3534c located on the side that is 180 degrees out of phase with the opening end 534a (that is, located between the pair of overhanging portions 534c located on the opening end 534a side) The inward projecting dimension is set to be larger than the projecting dimension inward in the radial direction of the projecting part 534c located on the opening end 534a side, and the projecting tip is axially formed (FIG. 29D). It is formed as a flat surface parallel to the (vertical direction).

According to the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the retaining ring 3534 is engaged with the shaft body 3542 by the engagement between the engaged portion 3542d of the shaft body 3542 and the protruding portion 3534c of the retaining ring 3534. Can be engaged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the retaining ring 3534 is prevented from slipping in the circumferential direction with respect to the shaft body 3542, and the rotational torque is also applied to the large rotational torque from the shaft body 3542 via the retaining ring 334. 15 (b)). As a result, the rotational torque is not only between the flat surfaces 533 a and 533 e 1 of the wheel gear 533 and the flat surface 542 a of the shaft body 3542, but also between the protrusion 533 of the wheel gear 533 and the open end 534 a of the retaining ring 3534. Since it can be handled, the rotational torque can be dispersed, and the durability of the shaft body 3542 and the wheel gear 533 can be improved accordingly.

  Further, since the engaged portion 3542d of the shaft body 3542 is disposed at a position that is 180 degrees out of phase with the flat surface 542a, as in the case of the second embodiment, the protrusion 533e, the retaining ring 3534, and the like. Are locked by each arm of the radio pliers, and only the operation of fitting the retaining ring 3534 into the circumferential groove 542c of the shaft body 3542 is performed, and the overhanging portion 2534c of the retaining ring 3534 is engaged with the engaged portion of the shaft body 3542. 3542d can be easily and reliably engaged.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured by omitting a part of the configuration in each embodiment, or a part of the configuration in each embodiment may be the same as that in the other embodiments or modifications. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured in combination with or in place of the components.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide groove 511a is formed in the main body member 510 of the first arm 500 and the projecting pin 730 inserted through the guide groove 511a is projected from the gear member 700 is described. The guide member 511a may be formed in the gear member 700 while the projecting pin is projected from the main body member 510 of the first arm 500 and the projecting pin is inserted.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as alepatchi, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused may be used.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a fixed symbol after a symbol string consisting of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after insertion of a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives the player a predetermined game value is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a system in which a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where a pachinko machine and a slot machine are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  In a gaming machine comprising an arm member displaced about an arm axis and a driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the arm member about the arm axis, the driving force applied from the driving means A gear member that rotates about the gear shaft, the gear member including a protruding pin that protrudes at a position eccentric to the gear shaft, and the arm member protrudes from the gear member. A guide groove for receiving an installation pin, wherein the gear member is rotated in a first direction, and the projection pin is moved along the guide groove, whereby the arm member is disposed at a first position; The angle formed between the straight line connecting the shaft center of the installation pin and the arm shaft and the straight line connecting the shaft center of the projecting pin and the gear shaft increases as the arm member approaches the first position from the predetermined position. Game machine A1 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine A1, as the arm member approaches the first position from the predetermined position, an angle formed between a straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis and a straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the gear axis. Becomes larger. Therefore, when an external force acts on the arm member and the external force is transmitted to the gear member, the closer the arm member is to the first position, the more the force generated in the gear member rotates in the direction of rotating the gear member. The force component (that is, the force component in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the gear shaft) can be reduced. As a result, when the arm member is held at the first position, the driving force required for the driving means to counter an external force (for example, gravity) acting on the arm member can be reduced. The capacity of the means can be reduced and energy consumption can be reduced.

  Further, when the displacement of the arm member held at the first position is started, the load on the driving means increases due to the influence of inertial force or frictional force. Since the angle between the straight line connecting the shaft center of the installation pin and the arm shaft and the straight line connecting the shaft center of the projecting pin and the gear shaft is large (that is, a state where the reduction ratio is large), the arm member is moved from the first position. By reducing the load on the driving means when starting the displacement, the capacity of the driving means can be reduced. On the other hand, when the arm member reaches the first position, even if the rotation speed of the gear member is constant, the displacement speed of the arm member can be reduced. Can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the gear member is rotated in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and the projecting pin is moved along the guide groove so that the arm member is disposed at the second position. As the angle between the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the gear shaft approaches the arm member from the predetermined position to the second position, A gaming machine A2 characterized by an increase in size.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, as the arm member approaches the second position from the predetermined position, the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis, the axis of the projecting pin, and Since the angle formed by the straight line connecting the gear shafts is increased, the same effect as the gaming machine A1 can be obtained. That is, when the arm member is held at the second position, the driving force required for the driving means to counter an external force (for example, gravity) acting on the arm member can be reduced. The capacity can be reduced and energy consumption can be reduced.

  When starting the displacement of the arm member from the second position, the load on the driving means can be reduced to reduce the capacity, while the arm member reaches the second position. The impact at the time of arrival can be suppressed, and the durability can be improved.

  In the gaming machines A1 and A2, the angle formed between the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm axis and the straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the gear shaft is such that the arm member is moved from the predetermined position to the first position. The “predetermined position” when it becomes larger as it approaches is a position where the arm shaft, the shaft center of the projecting pin, and the gear shaft are arranged on one straight line.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the arm member can be displaced to the first position by the rotation of the gear member in the first direction, and the arm member is in the first position in the guide groove of the arm member. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the state where the gear member is arranged, an area for the further rotation of the gear member in the first direction and movement of the projecting pin of the gear member is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the state where the arm member is disposed at the first position in the guide groove of the arm member, the gear member is rotated in the first direction. Since the region for moving the projecting pin is formed, the gear member is further rotated in the first direction from the state where the arm member is disposed at the first position, and the projecting pin is moved along the guide groove. The arm member can be pressed toward the first position by absorbing the gap between the arm shaft and its bearing or the gap between the projecting pin and the guide groove. Thereby, rattling at the first position of the arm member can be suppressed, and as a result, the arm member can be firmly held at the first position.

  In the gaming machine A3, after the arm member is disposed at the first position, the gear member connects a straight line connecting the shaft center of the projecting pin and the arm shaft and a shaft center of the projecting pin and the gear shaft. A gaming machine A4 which is rotated to a position where the straight line is orthogonal to the gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the gear member includes a straight line connecting the axis of the projecting pin and the arm shaft, and the projecting pin after the arm member is disposed at the first position. Since the shaft and the straight line connecting the gear shaft are rotated to a position orthogonal to each other, even if an external force is applied to the arm member, the force component in the direction of rotating the gear member (that is, the axis of the projecting pin and the gear) Force component in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the axes) does not occur, and the rotation of the gear member can be restricted. As a result, since the arm member can be mechanically maintained at the first position, the driving force of the driving means can be reduced (or released). As a result, the capacity of the driving means can be reduced and the energy consumption can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the guide groove of the arm member extends in a straight line.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the guide groove of the arm member extends in a straight line, so that after the arm member is arranged at the first position, the gear member is first When further rotated in the direction, the projecting pin of the gear member can be gradually pressed against the inner wall surface of the guide groove of the arm member. That is, it is possible to gradually absorb the gap between the arm shaft and the bearing or the gap between the projecting pin and the guide groove and press the arm member toward the first position.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, comprising: a case member in which the arm member and the gear shaft are disposed; and a rotational position detecting means that is disposed in the case member and detects a rotational position of the gear member, The gear member is disposed on the case member so as to be rotatable about the gear shaft, and has a gear body with teeth engraved on an outer peripheral surface thereof, and projects radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear main body. And a detected part detected by the rotational position detecting means, and the case member is erected from the case member toward the detected part and extends along a movement locus of the detected part. A gaming machine A6 comprising a restriction rib provided.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the inclination of the gear member can be effectively suppressed. That is, when the projecting pin of the gear member is moved along the guide groove of the arm member, the gear member is inclined by the action of the reaction force on the projecting pin that presses the inner wall surface of the guide groove. . In this case, according to the gaming machine A6, the restriction rib is provided on the case member so as to stand toward the detected portion of the gear member and extends along the movement locus of the detected portion. When is tilted, the detected portion can be received by the regulating rib. Thereby, while suppressing the increase in the rotational resistance of a gear member, the excessive inclination of a gear member can be avoided and the damage of the gear shaft or a tooth surface can be suppressed.

  In particular, the portion to be detected is a portion projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body, and the portion where displacement is maximized when the gear member is tilted. The excessive inclination of the gear member can be effectively suppressed. Furthermore, by setting the detected portion, which is a portion detected by the rotational position detecting means, as a portion that also serves as a stopper function that suppresses the inclination of the gear shaft, as described above, these two components can be used. Compared with the case where it is provided separately, it is possible to simplify the structure and reduce the cost of parts.

  In the gaming machine A6, a gap is formed between a standing tip of the restriction rib and a bottom surface of the detected portion facing the case member.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, a gap is formed between the standing tip of the regulating rib and the bottom surface of the detected portion facing the case member. When the reaction force acting on the projecting pin that presses the wall surface is small, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of contact resistance by maintaining a gap between the bottom surface of the detected portion and the standing tip of the regulating rib. . Thereby, the driving force required for the rotation of the gear member can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the detected part is formed by curving an edge of a bottom surface facing the case member in an arc shape.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the detected part is formed by curving the edge of the bottom surface facing the case member in an arc shape, which is caused by the inclination of the gear member. And when the bottom face of a to-be-detected part is contact | abutted to a regulation rib, it can suppress that the edge part of the bottom face of a to-be-detected part is caught in a regulation rib. Therefore, the gear member can be smoothly rotated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A8, the gear member is characterized in that the protruding pin is erected from the detected portion.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in any of the gaming machines A6 to A8, since the projecting pin is erected from the detected portion, the gear member rotates and the projecting pin is the guide groove of the arm member. When the projecting pin receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove, only the detected part that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the gear body is partially tilted. Thus, the inclination of the gear body (gear shaft) can be easily suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that it rotates with the tooth surface of a gear main body, and the tooth surface of the other member which meshes with the tooth surface shifted | deviated, and rotation resistance becomes excessive and a tooth surface wears.

  In the gaming machine A9, the regulation rib of the case member is located radially outward from the base of the projecting pin when viewed in the axial direction on the gear shaft of the gear member.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the restriction rib of the case member is located radially outward from the base of the projecting pin in the axial direction of the gear shaft of the gear member. When the projecting pin receives a reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove, the protruding tip side of the detected portion (that is, the portion closest to the case member) can be received by the regulating rib, and the inclination of the gear member Can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A10, the regulation rib of the case member extends to a rotational position where the detected portion of the gear member is detected by the rotational position detecting means. .

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A6 to A10, the restriction rib of the case member extends to the rotational position where the detected portion of the gear member is detected by the rotational position detecting means. Therefore, when the gear member is rotated while the projecting pin receives the reaction force from the inner wall surface of the guide groove, the detected portion can be prevented from colliding with the rotational position detecting means. Thereby, the reliability of the rotation position detection of a gear member can be improved.

  A part of the outer surface of the cylindrical shaft-shaped body is a flat surface, and a D-shaped cross section formed in a D-shaped cross section and a circumferential groove recessed along the circumferential direction on the outer surface of the D-shaped cross section And a through hole formed in a D-shaped cross section by making a part of the inner surface of the circular hole a flat surface so that the D-shaped cross section of the shaft body can be inserted, The rotating body that rotates together with the shaft body by engaging the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section, and prevents the shaft body from coming out of the axial direction from the insertion hole of the rotating body. Therefore, in the gaming machine comprising a retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove, and a driving means for applying a rotational driving force to the shaft body or the rotating body, the rotating body is moved from the axial end surface to the shaft body. A gaming machine B1 comprising a protruding portion protruding along the line.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the D-shaped cross section of the shaft body is inserted into the insertion hole of the rotating body, and the retaining ring is inserted into the circumferential groove in the D-shaped end surface portion of the shaft body protruding from the axial end surface of the rotating body. By fitting, the shaft body is prevented from coming off in the axial direction from the insertion hole of the rotating body. In this case, since the projecting portion protrudes along the shaft body on the axial end surface of the rotating body, when the retaining ring is fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft body, the projecting portion and the retaining ring are Each tool can be locked with a tool such as pliers. That is, it is not necessary to lock the shaft body with a tool. Therefore, the retaining ring can be fitted into the circumferential groove of the shaft body without damaging the shaft body. In particular, when the shaft body is made of brass, it is effective because it is easily damaged. Examples of the shaft body damage include a case where a flaw is formed on the surface of the shaft body and a case where the shaft center of the shaft body is bent.

  In the gaming machine B1, the protruding portion is located between opposing opening ends of a retaining ring fitted in a circumferential groove of the shaft body.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, it is possible to suppress the retaining ring from dropping from the circumferential groove of the shaft body.

  That is, there is a relative rotational position between the shaft body and the retaining ring where the engagement between the shaft body and the retaining ring is easily released, and when the relative rotational position is reached, the shaft body is pulled out from the insertion hole of the rotational body. If a load is applied to the retaining ring, the retaining ring may fall out of the circumferential groove of the shaft body.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, since the protrusion is located between the opening ends of the retaining ring fitted in the circumferential groove of the shaft body, the opening end of the retaining ring is brought into contact with the protrusion. Thus, the relative rotation of the retaining ring with respect to the shaft body can be restricted. Therefore, by setting the position of the protrusion to an appropriate position, the relative rotational position of the shaft body and the retaining ring is maintained at an appropriate position, and the retaining ring is prevented from dropping from the circumferential groove of the shaft body. it can.

  In the gaming machine B2, a gaming machine B3 comprising engagement means for engaging a retaining ring with a circumferential groove of the shaft body.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, it is possible to improve the durability of the shaft body and the rotating body.

  That is, in the structure in which the rotational torque transmitted between the rotating body and the shaft body is received by the flat surface of the insertion hole in the rotating body and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section in the shaft body, the burden on these flat surfaces is large. The durability is reduced.

  On the other hand, since the gaming machine B3 includes an engaging means for engaging the retaining ring with the circumferential groove of the shaft body, the retaining ring is rotated together with the shaft body through the engagement by the engaging means. be able to. Thereby, not only the flat surface of the insertion hole in the rotating body and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section in the shaft body, but also the protrusion and stop in the rotating body are transmitted to the rotating torque transmitted between the rotating body and the shaft body. It can also be handled between the open ends of the ring. Thereby, rotational torque can be disperse | distributed and the improvement of the durability of a shaft body and a rotary body can be aimed at that much.

  Further, in order to increase the engagement area between the flat surfaces and improve the durability, the shaft body and the rotating body are increased in size and weight. However, according to the gaming machine B3, the shaft body is removed. Since it is a structure in which the retaining ring that plays a role as a stopper is also used for the role of bearing the rotational torque, it is possible to reduce the size and weight.

  In the gaming machine B3, the retaining ring includes an annular portion in which a part of the annular shape is cut out to form an open end, and a plurality of circumferential locations on the inner circumferential side of the annular portion, radially inward. The engagement means is formed on the engaged portion formed as a flat surface or a recess on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft body. A gaming machine B4 characterized in that it engages at least one overhang portion of a retaining ring.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the retaining ring is formed as an E-shaped retaining ring in which a plurality of projecting portions are projected on the inner peripheral side of the annular portion, and the engaging means is Since at least one projecting portion of the retaining ring is engaged with the engaged portion formed as a flat surface or a recess on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft body, the retaining ring is inserted into the circumferential groove of the shaft body. Can be firmly engaged. That is, since the rotation torque can be reliably received by the engagement between the overhanging portion and the engaged portion, the durability of the shaft body and the rotation body can be improved, and the transmittable rotation torque can be increased. it can. Moreover, since a general-purpose component (E-type retaining ring) can be used as the retaining ring, the cost of the component can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, the engaged portion is formed as a flat surface or a concave portion on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove, so that the engagement between the circumferential groove of the shaft body and the retaining ring is achieved, and the size and weight are reduced. Can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine B4, the engaged portion formed on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft body is in a state where the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross-section are engaged with the protruding portion. A gaming machine B5 that is positioned 180 degrees out of phase.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the engaged portion formed on the bottom surface of the circumferential groove of the shaft body is engaged with the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section. In this state, since the phase is 180 degrees different from that of the protrusion, the operation of engaging the protruding portion of the retaining ring and the engaged portion of the shaft body can be easily and reliably performed. That is, when the D-shaped cross section of the shaft body is inserted into the insertion hole of the rotating body and the D-shaped end surface portion of the shaft body protrudes from the axial end surface of the rotating body, Since the engaged part is located on the different side), the retaining ring fitting direction for positioning the protrusion between the opening ends of the retaining ring and the protruding part of the retaining ring are engaged with the shaft body. It is possible to match the fitting direction of the retaining ring for engaging with the portion. Therefore, the projecting portion and the retaining ring are locked with a tool such as pliers, and the retaining ring is engaged with the shaft body only by inserting the retaining ring into the circumferential groove of the shaft body. It can be easily and reliably engaged with the joint.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the protrusion is formed at a position that is in phase with a flat surface in the insertion hole of the rotating body.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the protrusion is formed at a position that is in phase with the flat surface in the insertion hole of the rotating body, so that the durability is improved. Can be planned. That is, in the rotating body, the portion where the flat surface is formed in the insertion hole is the thickest (thickness in the radial direction) and becomes a portion where the strength is ensured. Therefore, by forming the protrusion in the portion having the same phase as the flat surface in the insertion hole, it is possible to receive the load acting from the protrusion at the portion where the strength is ensured. Durability can be improved. In addition, if the position is in phase with the flat surface in the insertion hole, the cross-sectional area of the protrusion can be increased, so that the strength is ensured and the durability of the protrusion itself is improved. Can be planned.

  In the gaming machine B6, the protrusion includes a flat surface that is located on a side facing the shaft body and is formed to be continuous with the flat surface of the insertion hole, and the flat surface of the insertion hole and the flat surface of the protrusion are The gaming machine B7 is configured to be engageable with a flat surface of a D-shaped cross section of the shaft body.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B6, the protrusion is provided with a flat surface that is located on the side facing the shaft body and formed continuously with the flat surface of the insertion hole, and the flat surface of the insertion hole. Since the flat surface of the projection and the flat surface of the D-shaped cross section of the shaft body can be engaged, the engagement area between the flat surfaces can be increased by forming the flat surface on the projection. . As a result, it is possible to disperse the rotational torque and improve the durability of the shaft body and the rotating body accordingly.

  Further, in this way, the protrusion that contacts the opening end of the retaining ring and plays the role of suppressing the relative rotation of the retaining ring with respect to the shaft body is engaged with the flat surface in the D-shaped cross section of the shaft body. Thus, by sharing the role of handling rotational torque, it is possible to reduce the size and weight while improving the durability of the shaft body and the rotating body.

  According to any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, comprising: an arm member that is displaced about an arm axis; and a decorative member that is rotatably arranged on the arm member and functions as a decorative body, A gaming machine B8, wherein a rotating body, a retaining ring, and driving means are disposed on the arm member to rotate the decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the durability of the mechanism for rotating the decorative member is improved while inhibiting the displacement of the arm member from being inhibited. be able to. That is, the decorative member is large and heavy in order to obtain a function as a decorative body. Therefore, the mechanism for rotating the decorative member is required to have durability for receiving a large rotational torque, while the arm member is provided with an arm shaft. Therefore, it is required to suppress the inertial force by reducing the weight. In this case, as a mechanism for rotating the decorative member, by adopting the above-described shaft body, rotating body, retaining ring, and driving means, while ensuring durability to receive a large rotational torque, achieving a small size and light weight, The arm member can be smoothly displaced.

  In a gaming machine comprising a case member, an arm member arranged to be displaceable on the case member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the arm member to displace the arm member relative to the case member, A second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member; and a connecting member having one end pivotally supported by the second rotating member and the other end movably coupled to the case member. A gaming machine C1 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the driving force is applied from the driving unit, the arm member is displaced with respect to the case member. In this case, one end of the connecting member is pivotally supported by the second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and the other end of the connecting member is movably connected to the case member. When displaced with respect to the case member, the angle formed by the arm member and the connecting member (the straight line connecting the connecting position where one end of the connecting member is connected to the second rotating member and the arm shaft, and the second rotating member With the change in the angle between the connecting position where one end of the connecting member is connected and the straight line connecting the connecting position where the other end of the connecting member is connected to the case member, the second rotating member is made relative to the arm member. It can be displaced (rotated). That is, since the driving means for applying the driving force to the arm member can be used as the means for rotating the second rotating member, the driving means only for rotating the second rotating member can be dispensed with.

  In the gaming machine C1, a first rotating member that is rotatably arranged on the arm member, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the first rotating member to rotate the first rotating member with respect to the arm member. A gaming machine C2 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, a driving force is applied to the first rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and the first rotating member is rotated with respect to the arm member. Since the driving means is provided, the arm member is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means, and the second rotating member is rotated along with the displacement of the arm member and simultaneously the driving force applied from the driving means. Thus, the first rotating member can be rotated. That is, it is not necessary to provide driving means (total of three) for each of the arm member, the second rotating member, and the first rotating member, and the arm member, the second rotating member, and the first rotating member are driven by the two driving means. can do.

  In the gaming machine C2, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged coaxially.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged on the same axis, so that both the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arm members. It is possible to enhance the effect of production when the two are simultaneously rotated with the displacement.

  In the gaming machine C3, the second rotating member is disposed on the back side of the first rotating member.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the second rotating member is disposed on the back side (that is, the gaming board side) of the first rotating member. It can be avoided that the trajectory of the connecting member overlaps the first rotating member and a part of the first rotating member is hidden by the connecting member. That is, the entire first rotating member can be exposed during the displacement of the arm member.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the second rotating member and the first rotating member have the same rotating direction.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the second rotating member and the first rotating member have the same rotation direction, so that the second rotation is accompanied by the displacement of the arm member. When the member and the first rotating member are rotated at the same time, it is possible to give the player an impression that both of them rotate smoothly, and the effect of that effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine C5, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged coaxially and have different rotation speeds.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged on the same axis and have different rotational speeds. And the first rotating member) can be rotated at different rotational speeds in the same rotational direction while being displaced on the same locus along the displacement direction of the arm member. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of giving the player the impression that the two members (the second rotating member and the first rotating member) rotate smoothly.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the case member includes a guide groove extending in a groove shape, and the other end of the connection member is slidably connected to the case member via the guide groove. A gaming machine C7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the connecting member is slidably connected to the case member via the guide groove of the case member. Compared with a configuration in which the other end of the arm member is pivotally supported by the case member, the displaceable amount of the arm member can be further increased. In this case, if the displaceable amount of the arm member is increased, the rotatable amount of the second rotating member can be further increased. Therefore, when displacing the arm member, not only a rendering effect due to the displacement of the arm member itself but also a rendering effect due to the rotation of the second rotating member in accordance with the displacement can be enhanced.

  One of the gaming machines C1 to C7 includes a liquid crystal display device, and the arm member has a first position on the display area of the liquid crystal display device and a second position outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device. The case member is formed along the outer edge of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and has an edge portion located on the displacement locus of the arm member, and the edge portion is a cross-sectional circle. A gaming machine C8 characterized by being curved in an arc.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the arm member from being hindered by the edge of the case member while securing the display area of the liquid crystal device.

  That is, in the configuration in which the arm member is displaced between the first position and the second position about the arm axis, the total length of the arm member becomes long, and therefore, when the arm member is displaced, in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the game board). It is easy for shaking to occur. Therefore, when the arm member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the arm member may collide with the edge of the case member and cause damage, or the arm member may be locked and displaced by the edge of the case member. There is a risk of disappearing. On the other hand, it is conceivable that the edge of the case member is not positioned on the displacement locus of the arm member. However, expanding the case member to the entire displacement region of the arm member means that the display region of the liquid crystal device is the case. Retracting the edge of the case member out of the displacement locus of the arm member cannot be performed because it is hidden by the member, because the wiring and board disposed on the back side of the case member are exposed and the appearance is impaired. I can't.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine C8, the edge portion that is formed along the outer edge of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and is located on the displacement locus of the arm member is formed to be curved in a cross-sectional arc shape. While securing an opening for exposing the display area of the liquid crystal device in the case member, when the arm member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the arm member that swings backward collides with the edge of the case member. In addition, the arm member can be guided by the curved arc of the cross section, and the shock can be buffered. Therefore, damage can be suppressed, and the arm member can be smoothly displaced by suppressing the arm member from being locked and stopped at the edge of the case member.

  In the gaming machine C8, the case member has a decorative shape formed adjacent to the edge portion.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C8, the case member is formed with a decorative shape adjacent to the edge of the case member, so that the edge is formed with a curved arc shape in cross section. Even if it is a case, it can be made to make a player recognize an edge part and a decoration shape as an integrated design without a sense of incongruity, and it can suppress that an edge part stands out unnaturally.

  The decorative shape means a shape formed on the front surface or the back surface of the case member. For example, a recess or a groove recessed on the front surface or the back surface, a protrusion or a stripe projecting on the front surface or the back surface, these Combinations are exemplified. The grooves and strips may be either linear or curved, or a combination thereof. The same applies to the gaming machine C11.

  In the gaming machine C9, the arm member displaces the front side of the case member, and the case member is formed of a light transmissive material, and the front surface is formed as a flat surface, and the decorative shape is A gaming machine C10 formed on the back surface.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the front surface of the case member to which the arm member is displaced is formed as a flat surface. Can be made. On the other hand, since the case member is formed of a light-transmitting material and the decorative shape is formed on the back surface, it is possible to ensure the effect of allowing the player to recognize the above-described edge portion and the decorative shape as an integrated design without a sense of incongruity. In addition, when the front surface of the case member is formed as a flat surface, the arm member slides easily so that scratches are easily formed. However, the decorative shape is formed on the back surface to make the scratches inconspicuous. Can do.

  In a gaming machine comprising a case member, an arm member arranged to be displaceable on the case member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the arm member to displace the arm member relative to the case member, The gaming machine D1, wherein the case member includes a first case portion in which the arm member is disposed and a second case portion detachably connected to the first case portion.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the case member includes the first case portion in which the arm member is disposed and the second case portion that is detachably connected to the first case portion. The case member can be diverted efficiently.

  That is, for example, when changing the disposition position of the arm member in accordance with the change of the displacement form of the arm member, it is useless to change the entire case member even though it is not necessary to change other parts. Similarly, when changing other parts, it is useless to change the entire case member even though it is not necessary to change the position of the arm member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the case member is divided into the first case portion where the arm member is disposed and the second case portion detachably connected to the first case portion, Only one of the first case part or the second case part needs to be changed according to the contents of the change, and the other of the first case part or the second case part can be used, so the case member for other models Can be used efficiently.

  In the gaming machine D1, the case member has a decorative shape formed in the second case portion, the gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the case member has a decorative shape formed on the second case portion, so that the case member can be efficiently used for other models. .

  That is, it is useless to change the entire case member even when the arrangement position of the arm member is changed in accordance with the change of the displacement form of the arm member, although it is not necessary to change the decorative shape. Similarly, when the decorative shape is changed, it is useless to change the entire case member even though it is not necessary to change the arrangement position of the arm member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, since the case member is divided into the first case portion where the arm member is disposed and the second case portion where the decorative shape is formed, It is only necessary to change one of the first case part or the second case part, and the other of the first case part or the second case part can be diverted, so the case member can be efficiently used for other models. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the case member includes a metal back plate member attached to the back side of the first case part and the second case part, and the first case part or the second case part One of the gaming machines D3 includes a protruding plate portion that protrudes outward and is sandwiched between the other of the first case portion or the second case portion and the back plate member.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in the gaming machine D1 or D2, the case member is connected by the metal back plate member to which the first case portion and the second case portion are attached to the back side thereof. The rigidity of the case member as a whole can be secured by strengthening the connection between the first case part and the second case part. Furthermore, one of the first case portion and the second case portion includes a protruding plate portion protruding outward, and the protruding plate portion is the other of the first case portion or the second case portion and the back plate member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the rigidity of the entire case portion while achieving simplification and downsizing of the structure by utilizing the overlap of the plate-like bodies.

  In the gaming machine D3, a gaming wall D4 is characterized in that a positioning wall located along the outer shape of the protruding plate portion is formed on the other back surface of the first case portion or the second case portion.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, a positioning wall is formed on the other back surface of the first case part or the second case part along the outer shape of the protruding plate part. Before mounting the back plate member, when the protruding plate portion protruding from one of the first case portion or the second case portion is disposed on the other back surface of the first case portion or the second case portion, the protruding plate The part can be positioned by the positioning wall. Therefore, the workability at the time of assembling the case member can be improved.

  In addition, the positioning wall does not need to be continuously formed along the outer shape of the protruding plate portion, and may be formed intermittently. That is, the positioning wall does not need to be provided on the entire outer shape of the protruding plate portion, and the positioning wall only needs to be partially scattered with respect to the outer shape of the protruding plate portion.

  In the gaming machine D4, a protruding height of the positioning wall is equal to a thickness dimension of the protruding plate portion, and a protruding front end surface of the positioning wall is a seating surface that receives a back plate member. A gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the protruding front end surface of the positioning wall serves as a seating surface that receives the back plate member, and accordingly, the back plate member and the first case portion or the second case portion The contact area between the other of the case portions can be increased, and the coupling between the two can be strengthened. Thereby, the rigidity as the whole case part can be improved.

  In the gaming machines D1 to D5, a second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, one end pivotally supported on the second rotating member, and the other end connected to the second case portion so as to be displaceable. A gaming machine D6, comprising: a connecting member to be operated.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D5, one end of the connecting member is pivotally supported by the second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and the other end of the connecting member Is movably connected to the second case member, so that when the arm member is displaced relative to the case member, an angle formed by the arm member and the connecting member (one end of the connecting member is connected to the second rotating member). A straight line connecting the connecting position and the arm shaft, and a straight line connecting the connecting position where one end of the connecting member is connected to the second rotating member and the connecting position where the other end of the connecting member is connected to the second case member. The second rotating member can be relatively displaced (rotated) with respect to the arm member with a change in the angle formed. That is, since the driving means for applying the driving force to the arm member can be used as the means for rotating the second rotating member, the arm member can be mounted without providing the driving means for rotating the second rotating member. With only one driving means for displacing, two operations of displacement of the arm member and rotation of the second rotating member can be achieved.

  In this case, since the other end of the connecting member is displaceably disposed in the second case portion, the distance between the arm shaft of the arm member and the other end of the connecting member can be increased. Thereby, the displacement effect of an arm member can be enlarged and the presentation effect by displacing the arm member can be heightened.

  The connection member and the case member need only be connected to the case member so that the other end of the connection member is displaceable. Therefore, when the arm member is changed, or in addition to this, the connection member is changed. Even in this case, the second case part can be used as it is with relative ease. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the other end of the connecting member is connected to the second case portion instead of the first case portion in this way, efficient use of the case member to other models and displacement of the arm member It is possible to achieve both a quantity expansion.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, gaming machines B1 to B8, gaming machines C1 to C10 and gaming machines D1 to D6, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, the gaming machines B1 to B8, the gaming machines C1 to C10, and the gaming machines D1 to D6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, gaming machines B1 to B8, gaming machines C1 to C10 or gaming machines D1 to D6, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine E3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first decorative body and the second decorative body are disposed so as to be displaceable in a game area or the like, and the first decorative body and the second decorative body are driven. A device that produces an effect by being displaced by the driving force of the means is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-115580).
However, in order to displace each of the first decorative body and the second decorative body independently, driving means are separately required for each of the first decorative body and the second decorative body, There was a problem that the cost increased accordingly.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the necessary number of driving means and reduce the cost accordingly.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes a case member, an arm member that is displaceably disposed on the case member, a driving force applied to the arm member, and the arm member mounted on the arm member. Drive means for displacing with respect to the case member, a second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, one end pivotally supported on the second rotating member and the other end of the second rotating member. And a connecting member connected to the case member so as to be displaceable.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the arm member is provided with a first rotating member that is rotatably arranged and a driving force is applied to the first rotating member. Drive means for rotating the first rotating member relative to the arm member.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, wherein the second rotating member and the first rotating member are coaxially arranged.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the arm member is displaced with respect to the case member by applying the driving force from the driving means. In this case, one end of the connecting member is pivotally supported by the second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member, and the other end of the connecting member is movably connected to the case member. When displaced with respect to the case member, the angle formed by the arm member and the connecting member (the straight line connecting the connecting position where one end of the connecting member is connected to the second rotating member and the arm shaft, and the second rotating member With the change in the angle between the connecting position where one end of the connecting member is connected and the straight line connecting the connecting position where the other end of the connecting member is connected to the case member, the second rotating member is made relative to the arm member. It can be displaced (rotated). That is, since the driving means for applying the driving force to the arm member can be used as the means for rotating the second rotating member, the driving means only for rotating the second rotating member can be dispensed with.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a driving force is applied to the first rotating member rotatably arranged on the arm member, and the first Since the first rotating member is provided with driving means for rotating the rotating member, the arm member is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means, and the second rotating member is rotated along with the displacement of the arm member, At the same time, the first rotating member can be rotated by the driving force applied from the driving means. That is, it is not necessary to provide driving means (total of three) for each of the arm member, the second rotating member, and the first rotating member, and the arm member, the second rotating member, and the first rotating member are driven by the two driving means. can do.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the second rotating member and the first rotating member are disposed coaxially. It is possible to enhance the effect when both the first rotating member and the first rotating member are simultaneously rotated with the displacement of the arm member.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
400 Case member 410 1st base body (a part of case member, 1st case part)
413 Regulating rib 415 Seat wall (positioning wall)
430 2nd base body (2nd case part)
431 Guide groove 433 Edge 434 Projection plate 450 Back plate member 500 First arm (arm member)
511a Guide groove 520 Arm shaft 531 Drive motor (drive means)
533 Wheel gear (rotating body)
533a Flat surface (flat surface of insertion hole)
533b Insertion hole 533e Projection 533e1 Flat surface (Flat surface of the projection)
534, 2534, 3534 Retaining ring 534a Open end 534b Ring portion 534c Overhang portion 2534c, 3534c Overhang portion 540 First rotating decorative body (decorative member, first rotating member)
542 shaft 542a flat surface (flat surface of the cross-sectional surface)
542b sectional surface 542c circumferential groove 2542d, 3542d engaged portion 550 second rotating decorative body (second rotating member)
600 Second arm (connecting member)
700 gear member 710 gear body 720 detected portion 730 projecting pin 790 gear shaft 900 drive motor (drive means)
L1 Straight line connecting the projecting pin and the arm shaft L2 Straight line connecting the projecting pin and the gear shaft Angle S formed by the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 Rotational position detection sensor (rotational position detection means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine comprising a case member, an arm member arranged to be displaceable on the case member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the arm member to displace the arm member relative to the case member,
A second rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member; and a connecting member having one end pivotally supported by the second rotating member and the other end movably coupled to the case member. A gaming machine characterized by   A first rotating member rotatably disposed on the arm member; and driving means for applying a driving force to the first rotating member to rotate the first rotating member relative to the arm member. The gaming machine according to claim 1.   The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second rotating member and the first rotating member are arranged coaxially.

Images